JP7575321B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, that can be controlled to create advantageous conditions for players.

Some gaming machines use a launching device to launch gaming balls, which are the gaming medium, into a gaming area, and when the gaming balls enter a winning area, such as a winning slot, provided in the gaming area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. In addition, some gaming machines are provided with a variable display device that can variably display (also called "variable") identification information, and are configured to change the gaming state (the state of the gaming machine; specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled) and provide a predetermined gaming value to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result (so-called pachinko machines).

The gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine becoming advantageous to the player in terms of making it easier for the ball to win, generating rights that lead to advantageous conditions for the player, or becoming more likely to meet the conditions for the payout of winning balls.

In a pachinko game machine, a "jackpot" occurs when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of a special pattern (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the entry of a game ball into the start winning hole. The derived display means that a pattern (final stop pattern) is finally stopped and displayed. When a jackpot occurs, for example, the big prize winning hole opens a predetermined number of times, and the machine transitions to a big prize game state in which the ball is more likely to win. Then, during each opening period, if a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of big prize winning holes are won, the big prize winning hole closes. The number of times the big prize winning hole opens is fixed to a predetermined number (e.g., 15 rounds). An opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the big prize winning hole closes when the opening time has elapsed even if the number of winning holes does not reach the predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize winning hole may be called a round. Also, the game during a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in a state where a pattern other than the pattern that will be the final stop pattern (for example, the center pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) on a variable display device continues for a predetermined time and stops, oscillates, expands and contracts, or changes shape while matching a specific display result, or where multiple patterns fluctuate synchronously with the same pattern, or the positions of the displayed patterns are swapped, and the possibility of a jackpot occurring continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states), a reach effect is called a reach effect. Also, a reach state and its appearance are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a reach variable display. If the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it is a "miss" and the variable display state ends. The player plays while enjoying how to generate a jackpot.

In such a gaming machine, there is a machine that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state and can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects with different expectations depending on the performance mode, and changes the suggestive effect to a performance mode with a high expectation by using a displayed special image. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that a pseudo consecutive announcement performance, a development destination announcement performance, or an active hold announcement performance is executed by a gift image displayed when the same type of gift box is opened . Also, for example, Patent Document 2 describes that a strong announcement performance in which a moving object falls is communicated to a player by displaying information on a role stock on the screen .

JP 2015-134097 A JP 2018-50980 A

There is room for improving marketability in gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in the above patent documents.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A suggestion performance execution means for suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including at least a first suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance having different expectations depending on the performance mode;
A special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image;
and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that changes the suggestive effect being executed in one performance mode to a performance mode having a higher expectation than the one performance mode by using the displayed special image,
The special image display effect execution means displays the special image in a manner that the special image moves so as to pass through a display position of the suggestion effect that is a target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed,
The special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect by a predetermined pattern of executing the special effect by changing the presentation mode of the first suggestion effect after the special image is stopped at a specific position, and a specific pattern of executing the special effect by changing the presentation mode of the second suggestion effect after the special image passes the specific position without being stopped at the specific position,
The ratio of the special effect being controlled to the advantageous state when the special effect is executed according to the predetermined pattern is different from the ratio of the special effect being executed according to the specific pattern,
When the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation changes due to the special presentation, there are a plurality of presentation modes after the change, and the proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on which presentation mode is changed to,
When the presentation mode is changed by the special presentation, the suggestion presentation has a longer execution time than when the presentation mode is not changed by the special presentation;
The special effect execution means is capable of displaying a specific image when executing the special effect.
It is characterized by:
Such a configuration can improve marketability.
The other gaming machine is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and includes special state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, variable display pattern determination means that can determine a variable display pattern, notification means that can execute multiple types of notifications including a value notification that notifies the player of the result of the value acquired by the player, suggestive performance execution means that suggests that the game is controlled to an advantageous state and that can execute multiple types of suggestive performances (for example, a performance that displays a title display in a predetermined manner, a performance that displays an active display in a predetermined manner, a dialogue performance that displays a dialogue display in a predetermined manner, a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern in a predetermined manner, etc.) that have different expectations depending on the performance mode, and a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12) that displays a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12). and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a chance-up effect in which the display color of the active display is changed from a normal color (white) to blue) in which a suggestive effect being executed in one effect mode is changed to an effect mode with a higher expectation level than the one effect mode by using the displayed special image. The special effect execution means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11) when the suggestive effect is being executed, and executes a special effect in a mode in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (for example, displays a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH or a decorative pattern, and executes a chance-up effect in a mode in which a key image 030IWG12 is stuck in the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 and rotates. See Figs. 8-15(9) to (15), Figs. 8-17(9) to 8 -18(17) etc.), the special state control means is capable of controlling to the special state until a first number of variable display is executed after the advantageous state ends, the notification means executes a value notification during the variable display in which the number of executions of the variable display in the special state is the first number, the advantageous state includes a first type advantageous state and a second type advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern using specific determination data when the number of executions of the variable display in the special state is the first number, and is capable of determining a variable display pattern using normal determination data when the number of executions of the variable display in the special state is less than the first number, the normal determination data being capable of determining any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern and a special variable display pattern in response to a variable display that triggers control to the first type advantageous state, The specific determination data is data that enables one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns, including a specific variable display pattern and a predetermined variable display pattern different from the special variable display pattern, to be determined in response to a variable display that triggers control to a first type advantageous state, and a specific variable display pattern is determined in both cases of a variable display that triggers control to a first type advantageous state and a variable display that triggers control to a second type advantageous state, and that determines an announcing variable display pattern capable of executing value notification by an announcing means in response to a variable display that does not trigger control to an advantageous state, and the specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the announcing variable display pattern (here, the first type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "02". The second type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "04". The specific decision data may be, for example, table data of the variation pattern decision table specified when the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected. The normal decision data may be, for example, table data of the variation pattern decision table specified when the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. The first type variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2. The second type variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. The type common variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation pattern PB3-2. The notification variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9. The short variable display period is characterized by, for example, the case of the variation pattern PB3-2 compared to the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 in the variable display control example AKC32).
According to such a configuration, when a special performance using a special image is executed, the special image can be given a story-like quality, thereby enhancing the performance effect and increasing interest.
In addition, an increase in data volume can be prevented, and the element of surprise when the variable display results in a specific result can be increased, thereby improving interest in the game related to the variable display, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram showing examples of a jackpot determination table and a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 030IW. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern configuration and a breakdown of fluctuation time. FIG. This is a timing chart showing the execution timing of each performance during a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each performance in the first and second parts of the Super Reach. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stock effect pattern determination table. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance-up effect pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a title display change pattern determination table, an active display change pattern determination table, a dialogue display change pattern determination table, and a decorative design change pattern determination table. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a stock effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a stock effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another specific example of the stock effect. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first and second parts of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first and second parts of a super reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for an active display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for an active display. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up promotion effect (fake). 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of keyhole (suggested) images and keyhole (real) images for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards, etc. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing for game control. 1 is a flowchart showing a special symbol process. A figure showing an example of determining the special chart display result. 13 is a flowchart showing a main processing for performance control. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. A diagram showing an example of determining the type of jackpot. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a miss fluctuation pattern. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a reference table for when the result is a miss. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a reference table for when the result is a miss. A figure showing a reference table at the time of a jackpot. A figure showing a variation pattern type selection table. A figure showing a variation pattern type selection table. A figure showing a variation pattern type selection table. A figure showing a variation pattern type selection table. A figure showing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. A figure showing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. A figure showing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. A figure showing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. A figure showing an example of setting a performance pattern designation command. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. A figure showing a special period performance setting table. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. A diagram showing an example of settings at the start of a jackpot. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. A diagram showing an example of settings at the end of a jackpot. A diagram showing an example of settings at the end of a jackpot. A diagram showing an example of settings at the end of a jackpot. A flowchart showing the process of starting the change in the performance pattern. A flowchart showing the processing during change of the performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of control of a presentation state. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of control of a presentation state. A diagram showing an example of variable display control, an example of jackpot control, and an example of presentation control at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of variable display control. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of variable display control. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of variable display control. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of control of a presentation state. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of control of a presentation state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc., are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed to resume the change of the special symbols from the state before the recovery.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). In addition, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process is ended.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 030IW)
Next, the characteristic feature 030IW of this embodiment will be described.

(Big hit determination table)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a variation pattern table. Among these, FIG. 8-1(A) is an example of a jackpot determination table used in this feature unit 030IW. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in this example, based on the hit determination random number, it is determined that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/300 in a low probability state, and that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/30 in a high probability state.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-1(A), and the probability of winning may be different depending on whether the first special symbol changing display is executed or the second special symbol changing display is executed, for example.

In addition, for example, if the setting can be set to one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and a setting confirmation process or setting change process is executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value, the probability of winning may differ depending on which setting value is set.

In addition, multiple types of jackpots may be provided, each with a different degree of advantage. Specifically, the number of rounds in the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game may be different depending on the jackpot type. In this case, when it is decided that a jackpot has occurred based on the hit determination random number, the type of jackpot is determined based on the type determination random number.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
8-1(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 030IW. Of these, FIG. 8-1(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for misses. Also, FIG. 8-1(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for big wins. Note that the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. 8-1(B) and (C) are both used in a low probability state. In a high probability state or a high base state, a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) with a different ratio of judgment values may be used.

In this example, as shown in Figure 8-1 (B), in the event of a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach A), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach B), fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)), and fluctuation pattern PA2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1(C), when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach A), fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach B), fluctuation pattern PB2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)), and fluctuation pattern PB2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)).

In this example, during a super reach after a reach is achieved, a stock effect in which an item (in this example, a key) is stocked, and a chance up effect in which the stocked item (key) is used to change the presentation mode of other effects (i.e., to increase the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by other effects) can be executed. This configuration can increase interest during a super reach, and can also heighten the sense of anticipation for the stock effect and chance up effect. Hereinafter, executing a chance up effect using a stocked item (key) is also referred to as releasing the stocked item (key).

In this example, the super reach is a series of effects that unfold after the reach is established. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2, and PB2-3 in which the chance up effect (and the stock effect) are not performed, there are two parts during the super reach: the first half of the super reach part A in which the pre-outpost effect that is the prelude to the battle effect is performed, and the second half of the super reach part in which the battle effect is performed. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB2-4, and PB2-5 in which the chance up effect (and the stock effect) are performed, there are three parts during the super reach: the super reach introduction part in which the stock effect is performed, the first half of the super reach part B in which the pre-outpost effect and the chance up effect are performed, and the second half of the super reach part in which the battle effect is performed. With this configuration, the stock effect and the chance up effect are performed in the period before the battle effect, which is the climax of the super reach, so that the effect can be gradually heightened and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-1 (B) and (C), a Super Reach in which a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) is executed is configured to have a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach in which a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) is not executed, and furthermore, a Super Reach B is configured to have a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach A. This configuration creates anticipation as to whether a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) will be executed and in which Super Reach it will be executed.

In addition, the example is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-1. For example, a variation pattern may be set in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once or multiple times before a super reach, and the probability of a jackpot may differ depending on the number of pseudo consecutive performances.

Next, the configuration of each fluctuation pattern will be described. Figure 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern and the breakdown of the fluctuation time. In this example, as shown in Figure 8-2, the elements that make up the fluctuation pattern (which can also be said to be the performances executed in the fluctuation pattern) are "normal fluctuation" which performs a fluctuation display in a normal manner, "shortened fluctuation" which performs a fluctuation display in a manner that is shorter than the normal fluctuation, "normal reach" which performs a normal reach as a reach performance, "super reach introduction (stock performance)" which performs a stock performance in the super reach introduction part as a reach performance, "super reach first half A (no chance up performance)" which performs a pre-outpost performance in the super reach first half part A, "super reach first half B (with chance up performance)" which performs a pre-outpost performance and a chance up performance in the super reach first half part B, "super reach second half (battle performance)" which performs a battle performance in the super reach second half part, and "win celebration performance" which performs a win celebration performance to celebrate the big win. Note that the examples shown in Figure 8-2 are not limited to those shown, and other elements such as an element that performs a pseudo consecutive performance may be provided.

As shown in Figure 8-2, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates from normal fluctuation, includes "normal fluctuation" (15 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, and has a total fluctuation time of 15 seconds. Fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates from shortening fluctuation, includes "shortening fluctuation" (5 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, and has a total fluctuation time of 5 seconds.

Fluctuating pattern PA2-1 is a fluctuation pattern that goes through a normal reach and then a miss, and includes a "normal reach" (20 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, with a total fluctuation time of 20 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 are fluctuation patterns that go through the first half part A of the super reach where no chance-up effect is executed, and the second half part of the super reach, resulting in a miss. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "first half A of the super reach (no chance-up effect)" (30 seconds) and "second half of the super reach (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and the total fluctuation time is 70 seconds.

Fluctuating patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5 are fluctuation patterns that go through the Super Reach introduction part, the Super Reach first half part B where the chance up effect is executed, and the Super Reach second half part, before ending in a miss. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "Super Reach introduction (stock effect)" (30 seconds), "Super Reach first half B (with chance up effect)" (40 seconds), and "Super Reach second half (battle effect)" (40 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 110 seconds.

Fluctuating pattern PB2-1 is a fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach leads to a jackpot, and the elements that make up the fluctuation pattern include a "normal reach" (20 seconds) and a "celebration effect when a win occurs" (20 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are fluctuation patterns that go through the first half of the Super Reach A where no chance up effect is executed, and the second half of the Super Reach, before a jackpot. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include the "first half of the Super Reach A (no chance up effect)" (30 seconds), the "second half of the Super Reach (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and the "celebration effect when a hit occurs" (20 seconds), and the total fluctuation time is 90 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PB2-4 and PB2-5 are fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot after passing through the Super Reach introduction part, the Super Reach first half part B where the chance up effect is executed, and the Super Reach second half part, and the elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "Super Reach introduction (stock effect)" (30 seconds), "Super Reach first half B (with chance up effect)" (40 seconds), "Super Reach second half (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and "Hit celebration effect" (20 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 130 seconds.

In the example shown in Figure 8-2, the performance times of the first half and second half of the Super Reach are the same for Super Reach A and Super Reach B, but this configuration is not limited to this, and the performance times may be different depending on the type of Super Reach.

(The timing of each performance during the Super Reach)
Next, the execution timing of the stock effect and the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a timing chart showing an example of the execution timing of each effect.

In this example, the fluctuation time (which can also be said to be the total performance execution time) is determined by the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 11 side, and the execution timing and performance execution time of the stock performance and chance up performance are determined based on the fluctuation pattern on the performance control board 12 side. However, as will be described in detail later, depending on the type of performance, the execution timing may be predetermined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Note that, without being limited to the configuration of this example, a fluctuation pattern may be set in which the execution timing and performance execution time of the stock performance and chance up performance are predetermined, and one of the fluctuation patterns may be determined on the main board 11 side.

Figure 8-3 (A) shows a case where a super reach without chance up is executed. In this case, as shown in Figure 8-3 (A), a pre-outpost performance is executed in the first half part A of the super reach, and a battle performance is executed in the second half part of the super reach.

Figure 8-3 (B) shows a case where a super reach with chance up is executed. In this case, a stock effect is executed first in the super reach introductory part. Then, in the first half part B of the super reach, a chance up effect is executed together with an outpost effect. Then, in the second half part of the super reach, a battle effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, there are three opportunities to stock items (keys) at a maximum of three timings, A to C, during the stock effect (timings (A) to (C) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)). Note that in this example, there are three timings at a maximum as opportunities to stock items (keys) during the stock effect, but this is not limited to the above configuration, and there may be a maximum of two or less, or four or more.

In addition, in this example, the title display (a presentation that displays a title display), active display (a presentation that displays an active display), dialogue display (a dialogue presentation that displays a dialogue display), and decorative pattern (a decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) in the first half of the Super Reach each suggest different odds of a jackpot depending on the presentation mode, and are configured so that when the corresponding chance-up presentation is executed, the presentation mode changes (i.e., the suggested odds of a jackpot increase).

Specifically, when one item (key) is stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for any of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern); when two items (keys) are stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for each of two of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern); when three items (keys) are stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for each of three of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern). Note that this is not limited to the configuration of this example, and chance-up performance may be executed multiple times for one performance. In this case, each time a chance-up effect is performed, a stocked item (key) is released.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, first to fifth timings (timings (1) to (5) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)) are provided as timings at which chance-up effects can be executed in the first half of the super reach. Note that in this example, the first to fifth timings in the first half of the super reach are determined for each variation pattern (or each type of super reach), but they may be common timings for all variation patterns (or types of super reach).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), the chance-up effect targeting the title display (the effect that displays the title display) can be executed at the first timing, the chance-up effect targeting the active display (the effect that displays the active display) can be executed at the second or fourth timing, the chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display (the dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display) can be executed at the third timing, and the chance-up effect targeting the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) can be executed at the fifth timing.

Whether the chance-up effect targeting the active display (effect that displays the active display) is executed at the second timing or the fourth timing is determined by lottery. On the other hand, the timing at which the chance-up effect targeting the title display (effect that displays the title display), the dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), or the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is executed is fixedly determined for each variation pattern. Note that this configuration is not limited to the above, and the timing at which the chance-up effect targeting the active display (effect that displays the active display) is executed may be fixedly determined, or the timing at which the chance-up effect targeting the title display (effect that displays the title display), the dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), or the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is executed may be determined by lottery to be one of a plurality of timings.

The execution order of the effects that are the subject of the Chance Up Effects is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-3, and may be other orders. However, it is desirable that the later the order that the effect is the subject of the Chance Up Effects, the more likely it is that the Chance Up Effects will increase the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, the more likely it is that the effect will change to one with a higher chance of a jackpot). This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the timing at which the Chance Up Effects will be executed, and prevents players who have high hopes for the timing of the change (for example, their hopes grow as the first half of the Super Reach progresses) from being disappointed.

In this example, when the chance up performance is executed during the super reach, the stock performance is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a pattern in which the chance up performance is executed without the stock performance may also exist. In this case, for example, a variation pattern including the stock performance and the chance up performance and a variation pattern including the chance up performance without the stock performance are provided in advance, and when the main board 11 side determines the former variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines the performance contents of the stock performance and the chance up performance according to the modes shown in Figures 8-5 to 8-8 described later based on the determined variation pattern, and when the main board 11 side determines the latter variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines whether or not to execute the chance up performance and the type of chance up performance to be executed based on the determined variation pattern. In this way, by providing a pattern in which the chance up performance is executed without the stock performance, the presence of the chance up performance is increased, and the player can enjoy the performance with a sense of superiority in a situation in which the chance up performance is visualized to be executed in the future. Furthermore, in such cases, the system may be configured so that the probability of a large number of chance-up effects being executed is higher when the stock effect is executed in advance than when it is not executed (i.e., the chance-up effect is configured to increase the likelihood of a big win), giving priority to the execution of the stock effect and creating anticipation for the execution of the stock effect.

In addition, in this example, in a super reach, there is always a first half part of the super reach and a second half part of the super reach, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, when a stock effect is executed, the first half part of the super reach can be omitted, and the second half part of the super reach can follow the super reach introduction part, and a chance-up effect can be executed in the second half part. This configuration can prevent the total effect execution time of a reach with high expectations from becoming too long.

When providing an exceptional pattern in which the first half of the super reach is omitted, in the basic pattern that is not omitted, it is desirable that when the first half of the super reach develops into the second half of the super reach, other performance images are displayed in a manner that covers all the performance images related to the super reach at the boundary between the first and second halves, or that the performance contents are clearly divided between the first and second halves. For example, at the boundary between the first and second halves, an effect image or character related to the chance up performance shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) described later, or an image such as the text display of "Pending Rank Up" may be displayed in a manner that covers all the performance images related to the super reach. Also, for example, the performance contents may be divided by executing an outpost performance in the first half and executing a battle performance in the second half, or the performance contents may be divided by displaying a battle scene in the first half and a conclusion scene such as a character unleashing a special move in the second half. By doing so, even when the first half of the super reach is omitted, the flow of the performance can be made natural.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-3, for convenience, the intervals between the timing of stocking and the timing of the chance-up effect are uniform, but they do not have to be uniform and can be any timing within the period.

(Execution time of each performance in Super Reach)
Next, the execution time of each effect in the super reach will be described. FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the first half and the second half of the super reach.

Of the examples shown in Figure 8-4, Figure 8-4 (A) shows an example in which a chance up effect is executed for the title display (a performance that displays the title display) at the first timing (timing (1) shown in Figure 8-4) of the first half of the super reach, a chance up effect is executed for the dialogue display (a dialogue performance that displays the dialogue display) at the third timing (timing (3) shown in Figure 8-4), and a chance up effect is executed for the decorative pattern (a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern) at the fifth timing (timing (5) shown in Figure 8-4) (corresponding to the eighth performance pattern of the chance up effect described below).

In addition, Figure 8-4 (B) shows an example in which a chance-up effect is executed for the title display (a performance that displays the title display) at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, and a chance-up effect is executed for the decorative pattern (a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern) at the fifth timing (corresponding to the seventh performance pattern of the chance-up effect described below).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4, in the latter part of the super reach, a moving body effect is executed in which the moving body 32 operates before the fluctuation ends (for example, when announcing that control is being given to a jackpot).

In this example, as shown in the case where a dialogue effect without a chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-4(A) and the case where a dialogue effect with a chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is configured to have a longer execution time when the effect mode changes due to the chance-up effect than when the effect mode does not change due to the chance-up effect. Specifically, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). With this configuration, when the chance-up effect is executed, a period for executing the chance-up effect and its target effect (for example, a period for announcing the change and the effect mode after the change) can be secured.

If the performance execution time of a performance were to change depending on whether or not a Chance Up performance is present, this would affect the execution timing of other performances, which could increase the amount of data related to performance control and complicate processing. Also, because the variable time (i.e. the total performance execution time) is fixedly determined in advance for each variable pattern, there is a risk that the performance will not fit within the time limit, or that there will be excess time. Therefore, in this example, the execution period of the movable body performance is made different depending on whether or not a Chance Up performance is present, thereby minimizing the impact on other performances and ensuring that all performances fit within the time limit without feeling unnatural.

In other words, in this example, the performance execution time T11 of the dialogue performance shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the performance execution time T12 of the dialogue performance shown in FIG. 8-4(B), while the performance execution time T21 of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is shorter than the performance execution time T12 of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 8-4(B). And, the performance execution time of the chance-up performance targeting the decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays decorative patterns) is the same.

For example, the movable body performance is controlled by moving the movable body 32 from the initial position to a performance position in front of the display area of the image display device 5 and keeping it at that performance position for a predetermined period of time, and controlling the image display device 5 to display an effect image or the like during the predetermined period to emphasize the movable body performance (at this time, the movable body 32 itself may be made to operate at the performance position), and then controlling the movable body 32 to move from the performance position to the initial position. In this way, the performance execution time of the movable body performance can be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the period during which the movable body 32 is at the performance position. By adjusting the performance execution time of the movable body performance in this way, it is possible to respond to small changes in the performance time depending on whether or not there is a chance up. With this configuration, while the performance execution time of the performance changes depending on whether or not there is a chance up performance, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to the performance control from increasing and the processing from becoming complicated, and to fit all the performances within the time without any sense of incongruity.

The adjustment of the presentation time may be performed, for example, by a presentation other than the moving body presentation. For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the moving body presentation is not executed before the end of the change, the presentation image related to the super reach may be returned to the normal background image before the end of the change, and then the time for which the decorative pattern indicating a miss is temporarily stopped may be lengthened or shortened to adjust the time.

In this example, the chance-up effect can be executed multiple times, and the execution time is configured to differ depending on the chance-up effect being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), chance-up effects that target decorative symbols have a longer execution time than chance-up effects that target title displays or dialogue displays. Although details will be described later, chance-up effects that target decorative symbols have a higher chance of winning than chance-up effects that target title displays or dialogue displays, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced by extending the execution time. With this configuration, various chance-up effects can be executed with suitable execution times, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this example, when one chance-up effect targeting one effect is being executed, other chance-up effects targeting other effects are not executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, chance-up effects with different targets are executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the chance-up effect being executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-5 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 030IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 030IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 030IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 030IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo-series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines, in step 030IWS802, a chance eye pattern as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo-series (for example, a combination of patterns that is one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445", which is not a reach but is not a jackpot pattern, or a combination of patterns in which the middle pattern is a special pattern exclusive to pseudo-series (a pattern in which letters such as "NEXT" are written, but no numbers are written, and which cannot form a jackpot combination)). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 030IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot is reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern includes a super reach (with chance up) (step 030IWS803). If the variation pattern does not include a super reach (with chance up), the process proceeds to step 030IWS811.

If the variation pattern includes a super reach (with chance up), the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the stock performance (step 030IWS804). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the chance up performance (step 030IWS805). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode after the change of the performance that is the target of the chance up performance (step 030IWS806). After that, the process proceeds to step 030IWS811. Details of steps 030IWS804, S805, and S806 will be described later.

In step 030IWS811, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the determined content of the performance (step 030IWS811).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 030IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 030IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Step 030: By executing the processing of IWS813, a performance is realized according to the variation pattern and the content decided to be executed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 030IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 030IWS815).

Next, we will explain the details of the process for determining the stock effect pattern in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS804).

In step 030IWS804, the stock effect pattern is determined, for example, by referring to the stock effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B).

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A (with chance up) fluctuation pattern PA2-4 or PB2-4, the first stock performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A) shown in Figure 8-6 (A) is referenced to determine the first performance pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the performance result, or one of the second and third performance patterns in which two items (keys) are stocked as the performance result.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up), the second stock performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B) shown in Figure 8-6 (B) is referenced to determine the first performance pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the performance result, the second or third performance pattern in which two items (keys) are stocked as the performance result, or the fourth or fifth performance pattern in which three items (keys) are stocked as the performance result.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-3 and 8-6, there are opportunities to stock items (keys) at timing A, timing B, and timing C during the stock performance. For example, in the first performance pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, and no items (keys) are stocked at timing B and timing C. Also, for example, in the fifth performance pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no items (keys) are stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. In this way, in this example, there are opportunities to stock one or multiple items (keys) at each timing.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), each performance pattern of the stock performance is configured to have a different probability of being determined at the time of a jackpot. In other words, the expected probability of a jackpot is configured to differ depending on the number of items (keys) stocked and the timing of stocking. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the performance patterns of the stock performance.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), the display patterns of the stock effects that can be determined are different for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. Specifically, in Super Reach A, a maximum of two items (keys) can be stocked, and in Super Reach B, a maximum of three items (keys) can be stocked. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to which type of Super Reach will result in the stock effect.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), the game is configured so that an item (key) is stocked at timing A regardless of the presentation pattern (in other words, when the stock presentation is executed, at least one item (key) is stocked). This configuration can prevent the player from losing all expectations about the stock presentation or losing interest in the stock presentation due to cases where an item is not stocked even when the stock presentation is executed.

In this example, the probability of a big win is higher when the stock effect is executed than when it is not executed, so the player will be looking forward to the occurrence of the stock effect. Therefore, for example, in the normal reach before the start of the super reach (the state in which the left and right symbols are ready and the middle symbol is changing on the image display device 5), a symbol that suggests that the stock effect will be executed or a symbol that teases whether it will be executed or not may be executed. For example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, a special symbol such as a "key stock time symbol" may be stopped as the middle symbol to transition to the stock effect. Also, for example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, the middle symbol may start to change at high speed, and after the screen changes to the super reach (covering the display area of the image display device 5 by whiteout, etc.), the transition may be made to the stock effect instead of the first half part of the super reach (outpost effect).

Next, we will explain the details of the process (step 030IWS805) that determines the presentation pattern for the chance-up presentation in the variable display start setting process.

In step 030IWS805, for example, the chance-up effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-7 (A) to (E) is referenced to determine the chance-up effect pattern.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 or PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, the first chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A: 1 chance up) shown in Figure 8-7 (A) is referenced to determine one of the first to third performance patterns that will perform the chance up performance once.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 or PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, the second chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A: Chance Up twice) shown in Figure 8-7 (B) is referenced to determine one of the fifth to sixth performance patterns in which the chance up performance is performed twice.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, the third chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: 1 chance up) shown in Figure 8-7 (C) is referenced to determine one of the first to fourth performance patterns that will perform the chance up performance once.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, the fourth chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: Chance Up twice) shown in Figure 8-7 (D) is referenced to determine one of the fifth to seventh performance patterns in which the chance up performance is performed twice.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is either of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 3, the 5th chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: Chance Up 3 times) shown in Figure 8-7 (E) is referenced to determine the 8th performance pattern in which the chance up performance is performed 3 times.

For example, in the first presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation, a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display) is executed once. Also, for example, in the eighth presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation, a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display), a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the dialogue display (dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display), and a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) are each executed.

In this example, before the chance-up effect is executed, a chance-up prompting effect is executed to prompt whether or not the chance-up effect will be executed. There are chance-up prompting effects in which the chance-up effect is executed after the effect and those in which it is not executed, and when distinguishing between the two, the former are also called chance-up prompting effects (true) and the latter chance-up prompting effects (false).

In the chance-up teasing performance (true), an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to a stocked item (key) (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is displayed, and then an image showing a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (real) image 030IWG11) is displayed. On the other hand, in the chance-up teasing performance (false), an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to a stocked item (key) (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is displayed, and then an image showing a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (real) image 030IWG11) is not displayed, and the image suggesting a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is erased.

In this example, a chance-up teasing effect (true) is always executed before a chance-up effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-7, for example, in the fourth and seventh chance-up effect patterns, a chance-up teasing effect (false) is executed that teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting a dialogue display (a dialogue effect that displays a dialogue display) will be executed, but which ultimately will not be executed. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to which effect the chance-up effect will be executed. Note that, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7, a chance-up teasing effect (false) may be executed when a chance-up effect is not executed and there are still stocked items (keys) remaining.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-7 (A) to (E), each presentation pattern of the chance-up effects is configured to have a different probability of being determined at the time of a jackpot (i.e., different jackpot expectation). This configuration allows players to focus on the presentation pattern of the chance-up effects. In particular, the later the timing of the change that is the subject of the chance-up effects (i.e., in the order of decorative pattern change > dialogue display change > title display change), the higher the jackpot expectation. This configuration allows players to focus on which chance-up effects are executed at which timing.

In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect, which changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays decorative patterns), is not executed during Super Reach A, but is configured to be executable only during Super Reach B. This configuration allows you to pay attention to which type of Super Reach the chance-up effect is executed during.

It should be noted that the presenter may be configured to be able to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol presentation that displays a decorative symbol) during any type of super reach, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7. In addition, in this example, the presenter is configured to execute a maximum of three chance-up effects, but the presenter is not limited to this configuration and may execute a maximum of four chance-up effects corresponding to all possible target effects, or may execute a chance-up effect targeting the active display at both the second and fourth timings, so that a maximum of five chance-up effects can be executed.

Next, we will explain the details of the process (step 030IWS806) that determines the presentation mode after the change in the presentation that is the target of the chance-up presentation in the variable display start setting process.

In step 030IWS806, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the title display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(A). If it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the active display (presentation that displays the active display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the active display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(B). If it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the dialogue display (dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the dialogue display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(C). If it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays the decorative pattern), the change pattern is determined by referring to the decorative pattern change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(D).

In this example, the title display (a presentation that displays the title display), active display (a presentation that displays the active display), dialogue display (a dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display) and decorative pattern (a decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) are configured so that the color tone of the presentation image related to the presentation suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, the following colors are configured to suggest the highest likelihood of a jackpot: gold > red > green > blue > normal color (white).

When the first change pattern is selected as the title display change pattern, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is selected, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to green.

In addition, if the first change pattern is determined as the active display change pattern, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to blue at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, if the second change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the first timing, if the third change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the third timing, and if the fourth change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to red at the third timing.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that changes the pending display (and the active display), a chance-up effect targeting the active display may be executed according to the performance pattern (for example, the timing of the change and the display state after the change are determined) that is determined as the look-ahead preview effect at the time of the initial winning.

When the first change pattern is determined as the change pattern for the dialogue display, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, when the second change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to green, and when the third change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to red.

In addition, if the change pattern of the decorative design is determined to be the first change pattern, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to green, if the second change pattern is determined, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to red, and if the third change pattern is determined, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to gold.

In this example, when the presentation mode of the target presentation changes due to the chance-up presentation, the tendency of the presentation mode after the change is configured to differ depending on the timing of the change. Specifically, the chance-up presentation targeted at the active display is configured to be more likely to change to a presentation mode with a higher expectation at the third timing, which is later than the first timing. Also, the chance-up presentation targeted at the decorative pattern is configured to be executed later and to be more likely to change to a presentation mode with a higher expectation than the chance-up presentation targeted at the title display, active display, or dialogue display. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up presentation will be executed, and to prevent disappointment for players who have high expectations for the timing of the change (for example, expectations grow as the first half of the super reach progresses).

In addition, if the color displayed after the change at an earlier timing suggests a higher expectation level than the color displayed after the change at a later timing, the presentation mode (color) displayed after the change at the later timing may be re-determined so that a drop in expectation level does not occur.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the Super Reach effect including the stock effect and the chance up effect will be described. Figures 8-9 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the stock effect. In Figures 8-9 to 8-10, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

(Stock effect (fifth effect pattern))
Figures 8-9 to 8-10 show the stock presentation of the fifth presentation pattern, in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C.

Specifically, when the variable display starts and a reach is achieved, a decorative pattern showing "6" is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5. Then, when the stock performance starts, the title display of the stock performance, "Key Stock" and "TIME", is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1). Note that the display mode of the title display may suggest the number of items (keys) to be stocked in the stock performance that starts later, or that a large number of items (keys) will be stocked. For example, the title display is generally displayed in a normal color (white), but when it is displayed in red, it may suggest that a larger number of items (keys) will be stocked than when it is displayed in a normal color (white).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), except during special effects, the active display AH is displayed as the active display in the lower left part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the small symbol KZ corresponding to the special symbol and the reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed in the center right part of the display area of the image display device 5.

Next, when the stock effect starts, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a timer image 030IWG01 indicating the remaining time of the stock effect and a "Key Stock Time" display 030IWG02 indicating that the stock effect is in progress are displayed. Furthermore, when timing A of the stock effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), character A prompting the user to press push button 31B, the valid operation period, and an image resembling push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, one key is stocked at timing A, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in Figure 8-9 (3), the text display "Stock x 1" indicating that one key has been stocked as an item, an image resembling a key, and an effect image emphasizing them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (4), a visual effect is displayed in which one key moves from the top left to the bottom right of the screen of the image display device and is stored (for example, a display in which it appears as if the key is flying in from the back left of the screen and being stored in the front right of the screen).

When the display showing the keys being stocked ends, a display showing the progress of the stock display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (5). Specifically, a display showing character A riding a swing is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 is displayed decreasing. At this time, a stock key image 030G03 is also displayed, showing the number of keys currently stocked.

Next, at timing B of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (6), character A is displayed to prompt the player to press push button 31B, along with an image of the valid operation period and push button 31B. Note that in this example, a display prompting the player to press push button 31B is displayed at timings A, B, and C of the stock effect, and character A's pose is configured to be different for each. Therefore, even if the display prompting the player to press the push button is displayed multiple times, the player's interest can be increased at each timing without becoming bored.

In the stock presentation of the fifth presentation pattern, keys are not stocked at timing B, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-9 (7), an image of a close-up of character A's face, the character "!?", and an effect image that emphasizes them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image, and no image indicating that keys will be stocked is displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect in which a character image is displayed instead of a key when no keys are stocked, the disappointment of not being able to stock a key can be reduced. In addition, in the stock effect of this example, even if only one key is stocked, the effect execution time is the same as when three keys are stocked. Therefore, if there is a period of time when no keys are stocked even when the button is pressed, the effect may become redundant and interest may decrease. Therefore, by displaying a character image instead of a key when no keys are stocked in this way to liven up the effect, the stock effect does not lose excitement even when the number of keys stocked is small. Note that the character image displayed when no keys are stocked does not have to be of one type, but may be different depending on the type of super reach being executed. In this way, future developments can be predicted by the displayed character image, and the character image can be given a meaning in terms of the effect.

The effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(7) is performed when no keys are stocked (i.e., indicates that no keys are stocked), so after the image displayed in the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(7) is erased, the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(8) is displayed in which the stock effect progresses, but the number of stocked keys indicated by the stock key image 030G03 does not increase. Note that the display period for the effect display when an item is stocked shown in FIG. 8-9(3) is set shorter than the display period for the effect display when an item is not stocked shown in FIG. 8-9(7). This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from feeling annoyed or losing interest by displaying undesirable effects for a long time without the effect of increasing the number of stocks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (9), a display showing the progress of the stock effect is displayed, and when timing C of the stock effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (10), character A prompting the player to press push button 31B, the valid operation period, and an image resembling push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, two keys are stocked at timing C, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in Figure 8-10 (11), the text display "Stock x 2" indicating that two keys have been stocked as items, an image resembling a key, and an effect image emphasizing them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (12), an effect display is performed in which two keys move from the top left to the bottom right of the screen of the image display device and are stored (for example, a display in which the keys appear to fly in from the back left of the screen and be stored in the front right of the screen).

When the display showing the stocking of keys ends, a display showing the progress of the stocking display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (13). Then, when the remaining time shown in timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (14), a display prompting the user to press push button 31B is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (15).

Then, when a press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the text display "Character A VS Enemy Character B" indicating the battle cards in the battle performance, as well as Character A and Enemy Character B, are displayed, and the stock performance ends.

In this example, when a super reach with chance up is executed, a stock effect is first executed in the super reach introductory part. Then, in the first half of the super reach, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which character A and enemy character B face each other and talk is executed primarily, and a chance up effect is executed incidentally. After that, in the second half of the super reach, a battle effect in which character A and enemy character B cross swords is executed. Note that, when a super reach without chance up is executed, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which character A and enemy character B face each other and talk is executed in the first half of the super reach, and a battle effect in which character A and enemy character B cross swords is executed in the second half of the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the match card for the battle performance is "character A vs. enemy character B", but in reality, multiple types of match cards (different types of friendly and enemy characters) are provided, and the match card is determined according to the type of super reach. That is, the pressing of the push button 31B triggers the display of the match card for the battle performance, thereby announcing the type of super reach. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation and tension when the push button 31B is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 8-10 (15). For example, in addition to or instead of the type of super reach, the types of friendly and enemy characters may be different depending on the expectation of a jackpot. Also, for example, if the performance stage is configured to transition depending on the game period or game state, such as the number of changes, a character previously associated with the performance stage may be made to fight against one of the enemy characters (which may be one of multiple enemy characters previously associated with the performance stage, or may be an enemy character determined by lottery).

(Stock effect (first effect pattern))
Next, we will explain the stock presentation of the first presentation pattern in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, and no item (key) is stocked at timing B and timing C, resulting in one key being stocked.

When the stock effect of the first effect pattern is executed, after the screen transitions of Figures 8-9 (1) to (8), a stock key image 030G03 indicating that there is one stocked key is displayed as shown in Figure 8-11 (9), and an effect display showing the progress of the stock effect is displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 8-11 (10), when the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, a display is displayed encouraging the user to press the push button 31B as shown in Figure 8-11 (11).

When a press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-11 (12), the text display "Character A VS Enemy Character B" indicating the battle cards in the battle performance, as well as Character A and Enemy Character B, are displayed, and the stock performance ends.

(Overview of the first and second half of Super Reach)
Next, an overview of the effects in the first and second parts of the Super Reach will be explained. Figures 8-12 to 8-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an overview of the effects in the first and second parts of the Super Reach. In Figures 8-12 to 8-13, the effects screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

When the Super Reach introductory part (stock effect) ends and the first half of the Super Reach begins, the title of Super Reach B, "A Deadly Battle Between Two People," is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-12 (1).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (1), a mini character A image 030IWC10 and a mini key image 030IWG10 representing the number of keys stocked in the stock effect are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. In this example, it is assumed that three keys have been stocked in advance in the stock effect, and the three keys are displayed in a manner that moves around the mini character A. Note that in this example, the keys stocked in the stock effect of the super reach introduction part are displayed as a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12 in the first half of the super reach.

In addition, a decorative pattern indicating "6" is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, and an active display AH is displayed at the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as an active display, and a small pattern KZ corresponding to the special pattern and a reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed at the center right side of the display area of the image display device 5.

Next, as a prelude, as shown in FIG. 8-12(2), character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other, and after that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(3), line image 030IWG20 is displayed saying "I'll kill you!"

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (4), character A image 030IWC01 is displayed alone, along with a line image 030IWG20 saying "I won't go easy on you."

As shown in Figures 8-12 (2) to (4), when the prelude effect is being executed and the chance-up effect is not being executed, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

When a chance-up effect targeting a dialogue effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 resembling a keyhole is displayed overlapping the dialogue image 030IWG20. Also at this time, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 holding a key is displayed next to the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11. This type of effect display indicates that the target of the chance-up effect is a dialogue effect.

Next, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, the key image 030IWG12 and keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12 (6), and then, to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), the key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12 (7).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, the dialogue image 030IWG20 changes from the normal color (white) to blue, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (8). This effect changes the presentation style of the dialogue effect as a result of the chance-up effect.

After that, when the first half of the Super Reach (outpost effect and chance up effect) ends and the second half of the Super Reach begins, a battle effect begins in which character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 cross swords, as shown in Figure 8-13 (9).

When character A wins against enemy character A, the word "Victory" is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (10), and then the combination of "666" decorative symbols, which is the jackpot symbol, is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (11).

(Chance Up Production)
Next, the chance-up effect outlined in Fig. 8-12 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 8-14 to Fig. 8-18. Fig. 8-14 to Fig. 8-18 also show the part of the chance-up effect that is omitted in Fig. 8-12.

Figures 8-14 to 8-15 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of chance-up effects that target active displays. Note that in Figures 8-14 to 8-15, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), an outpost display is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face off against each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), a display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. Also, at this time, a display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Note that the performance images related to the outpost performance (e.g., character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in Figure 8-14 (1) and onwards, but are omitted from the illustration for simplicity. In this example, the performance images related to the outpost performance have a lower display priority than performance images related to the chance up performance (e.g., key image, keyhole image, mini character image, etc.) and performance images related to the performance that is the target of the chance up performance (e.g., title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and are displayed in a lower layer than those images. The details will be described later, but the performance images related to the outpost performance are covered by the performance images related to the chance up performance at the timing of Figure 8-15 (13) to (14).

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (true) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (2), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (3), a display effect begins in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the active display AH that is the target of the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (5), a display effect is displayed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 overlaps the active display AH. At this time, triangular marks are displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 to indicate that it is shrinking.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-14 (2) to (5), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH. This configuration allows you to focus on the chance-up teasing effect and the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (6), the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette on the active display AH, and a performance display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 also become a silhouette, and a performance display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (7), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 that resembles a keyhole is displayed on the active display AH. This type of effect display makes it clear that the chance-up teasing effect being executed is a chance-up teasing effect (true), and also makes it clear that the target of the chance-up effect is the active display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(8), an effect is displayed in which character A, located at the front of the screen, throws a key into keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, located at the back of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), an effect is displayed in which key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front of the screen toward keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed at a size larger than keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(10), it is displayed as if it is moving toward keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away). This configuration draws attention to the key image 030IWG12 acting on the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, enhancing the presentation effect of the chance-up presentation.

Then, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15 (11), and to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), a key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15 (12).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), character A and the text "Pending Rank Up" are displayed along with an effect image that covers the image related to the outpost effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), by displaying a close-up of character A along with an effect image that covers the image related to the outpost effect, the awkward feeling of a chance-up effect being executed in the middle of the outpost effect is reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), character A and the text display "Pending Rank Up" are erased while the effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect is still displayed, the active display AH becomes a silhouette, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed again, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it.

In this example, when a chance-up effect targeting an active display is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), the image display device 5 displays in the upper layers in the following order: decorative pattern > mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 > effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect > active display AH > image related to the outpost effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (15), the effect image covering the image related to the outpost performance is erased, and the active display AH is displayed in a color that has changed from the normal color (white) to blue. Also, because one of the stocks has been released and an item (key) has been consumed due to the chance-up performance targeting the active display, the number of mini key images 030IWG10 moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10 has decreased by one.

In this example, when a performance that is the target of the chance-up performance is being performed, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, and the chance-up performance is performed in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 acts on the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Specifically, as shown in Figs. 8-14 to 8-15, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, and the chance-up performance is performed in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates. With this configuration, when a chance-up performance using the key image 030IWG12 is performed, the performance effect can be enhanced by providing a story-like element in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates (i.e., the key is opened), and the interest can be increased.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed approximately in the center of the effect image related to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect (see, for example, FIG. 8-14 (7)), and when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, a chance-up effect that targets other effects is not executed. For example, when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, a chance-up effect that targets the dialogue display is not executed. This configuration makes it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect, and also draws attention to the timing at which the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (8), the stored key image and character image (i.e., mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10) are displayed moving, and when the chance-up effect is executed, an effect is displayed in which the character throws a key into the keyhole. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the key image and to enhance the effect of the chance-up effect.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (6), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves in a manner that revolves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and stops moving when the chance-up effect is executed. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the key image and to enhance the effect of the chance-up effect.

In this example, the key is configured to look different when it is stocked and when it is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (8), when the key image is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area in the stock performance, the key image is displayed smaller in size than when it is displayed to move around the character in the outpost performance as shown in FIG. 8-12 (1). This configuration makes it possible to make the key image easier to see in the stock performance in which the key is the main focus, and to make the key less conspicuous when the outpost performance is the main focus. For example, the key image may be displayed larger when the key is stocked in the stock performance than when the character throws the key into the keyhole in the chance up performance (initial most enlarged state). This configuration allows the stock to have more impact when it is opened than when the key is stocked. Also, by making it more impactful, the player can be impressed that the performance is favorable, even if the performance that is the target of the chance up performance has a low expectation.

Next, we will explain a specific example of a chance-up effect that targets decorative symbols. Figures 8-16 to 8-18 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of a chance-up effect that targets decorative symbols. Note that in Figures 8-16 to 8-18, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), an outpost performance is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face off against each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), a performance display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 moves as if circling the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), the movable body 32 is located in an initial position that covers a portion of the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5.

Note that the performance images related to the outpost performance (e.g., character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in Figure 8-16 (1) and onwards, but are omitted from the illustration for simplicity. In this example, the performance images related to the outpost performance have a lower display priority than performance images related to the chance-up performance (e.g., key images, keyhole images, mini-character images, etc.) and performance images related to the performance that is the target of the chance-up performance (e.g., title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and are displayed on a lower layer than those images.

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (true) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (2), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. In addition, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 displayed during the chance-up teasing effect is represented by a dotted line in this example as shown in Figure 8-16, but in reality it has a transparency that allows the performance images in lower layers (for example, performance images related to the outpost performance) to be visible, and is designed to not interfere with the content of the super reach (i.e. the outpost performance) as much as possible even while the chance-up teasing effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(3), a display effect is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-16(4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the decorative pattern display area that is the target of the chance-up display, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-16(5), a display effect is performed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 reaches the center position (corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. At this time, a triangular mark indicating that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is shrinking is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. Also, a display effect is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette, and a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 also become a silhouette, and a glowing effect image is displayed around them. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-16(5) to FIG. 8-16(6), when changing the pose of the mini character A, a silhouette image is first displayed, and then the mini character A image in the changed pose is displayed from the silhouette image. In this way, by switching images between silhouette images rather than using material data that causes the mini character to move and change its pose, the material data can be simplified and the man-hours and costs involved in production can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed near the center position (the position corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. This type of effect display makes it clear that the chance up teasing effect being executed is a chance up teasing effect (true), and that the target of the chance up effect is a decorative pattern.

In this example, when executing a chance-up effect for a dialogue effect, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed approximately at the center of the dialogue image 030IWG20 as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), while when executing a chance-up effect for a decorative pattern, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the center position (corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 from being covered by the movable body 32 and becoming difficult to see, and allows the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 to be displayed appropriately according to the characteristics of the target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(8), an effect is displayed in which character A, located at the front of the screen, throws a key into the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, located at the back of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), an effect is displayed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front of the screen toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed at a size larger than the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(10), it is displayed as if it is moving toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away).

Then, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, a key image 30IWG12 and a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (11), and to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), a key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (12).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), character A and the text display "Pattern Rank Up" are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (14), while character A and the text display of "Pattern Rank Up" are still displayed, an effect is displayed in which the left decorative pattern begins to rotate in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and the right decorative pattern begins to rotate in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13) to (14), by displaying character A in close-up, the effect image related to the outpost effect is obscured, reducing the sense of incongruity caused by the chance-up effect being executed in the middle of the outpost effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (15), an image of Character A and Character B standing side by side is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance display is performed in which the rotating left and right decorative patterns move to a position superimposed on the image. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (16), a glowing effect image is displayed around the rotating left and right decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (17), the glowing effect image around the left and right decorative patterns is erased, and the left and right decorative patterns change from the normal color (white) to gold and are displayed with the word "GOLD" written on them, and the left and right decorative patterns stop rotating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (18), the gold right and left decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and the remaining prelude effects are executed. Since all stocked keys have been used due to the chance-up effect targeting the decorative patterns being executed, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and mini key image 030IWG10 are no longer displayed, but no special effects are executed to indicate that they will not be displayed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the mini key image 030IWG10, which is no longer in use, from standing out.

In this example, regardless of where the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed (i.e., regardless of which effect is the target of the chance-up effect), at least a part of the chance-up teasing effect is executed in a common manner. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-14 (2) to (5) and 8-16 (2) to (5), even if the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect are different, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed in a close-up across the entire screen, and is then displayed in a common manner that is gradually reduced. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to whether the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed, i.e., whether the chance-up effect is executed, as well as which effect is the target of the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this example, regardless of the position where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed in the chance-up effect (i.e., regardless of the type of effect being targeted), an image is displayed in a common display position to notify that the performance mode of the target effect will change. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display "Pending rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed to notify that the performance mode will change. This configuration makes it easier to recognize that the performance mode of the target effect will change due to the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the presentation mode of the target presentation changes in the chance-up presentation. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-15 (13) to (15) and Figures 8-17 (13) to 8-18 (17), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the active display or decorative pattern mode changes. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the change in presentation mode of the target presentation due to the chance-up presentation.

In this example, the effect images relating to at least some of the effects among the multiple types of effects that are the target of the chance-up effect have a higher display priority than the key image, even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. Specifically, the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the key image, even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure visibility for some effects in any situation. Furthermore, for effect images relating to other effects (for example, images that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue displays or title displays), the display priority is set to be lower than that of the key image when the key image acts on the keyhole image, thereby realizing a realistic effect and enhancing the effect of the effect.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), when executing the chance-up effect, it is possible to display notification images such as effect images and characters covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, and text displays such as "reserved rank up" and "pattern rank up". Then, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect by using a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect when the notification images are displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), a pattern in which the presentation mode of the decorative pattern changes while the character or text display of "pattern rank up" remains), and a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the target effect at a time other than when the notification image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15), a pattern in which the presentation mode of the active display changes after the effect image, character, or text display of "reserved rank up" is erased). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the presentation mode of the target effect will change by displaying the notification image, and it is possible to execute the chance-up effect suitably by using a presentation pattern according to the target effect. In particular, with the former, the effect can be made more spectacular by seamlessly increasing the chance (i.e., changing the presentation mode of the target effect) while the notification image is displayed, and with the latter, the chance is increased (i.e., changing the presentation mode of the target effect) after the notification image is erased, preventing an increase in the amount of data related to effect control.

In addition, in this example, a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect when the notification image is displayed has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the target effect at a time other than when the notification image is displayed. Specifically, a chance-up effect in which the mode of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance-up effect in which the mode of the active display changes (see Figure 8-7). With this configuration, the expectation can be varied depending on the flashiness of the presentation pattern, increasing interest.

In this example, the notification image can identify which effect's presentation mode has changed, and an image different from the presentation image related to that effect is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the text display "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" is displayed. Such a configuration makes it easy to recognize which effect's presentation mode has changed.

In this example, the notification image displayed during the execution of the chance-up effect is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image related to the super reach (outpost effect), but the effects that are the subject of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered, and the latter have a higher probability of winning than the former. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), the notification image includes an effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost effect, as well as a character and the text display of "reserved rank up" or "pattern rank up". This notification image covers the active display AH, but does not cover the decorative pattern. And the chance-up effect in which the state of the decorative pattern changes has a higher probability of winning than the chance-up effect in which the state of the active display changes (see Fig. 8-7). With this configuration, the expectation level can be varied depending on the flashiness of the chance-up effect, and interest can be increased.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered, with the latter being more likely to be executed at a later timing within one variable display period than the former. Specifically, chance-up effects in which the state of the decorative pattern changes are executed later than chance-up effects in which the state of the active display changes (see Figure 8-3). With this configuration, it is possible to execute chance-up effects according to the time when the player's expectations are highest.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered. In the latter case, one notification image is switched to another and displayed. Specifically, when a chance-up effect that targets a decorative pattern is executed, an image of character A is displayed as shown in Figures 8-17 (13) to (14), and then an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed as shown in Figures 8-17 (15) to 8-18 (17). This configuration can enhance the effect of the chance-up effect, which has a high expectation.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up teasing effect (fake) will be described. Figure 8-19 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the chance-up teasing effect (fake). In Figure 8-19, the transition of the effect screen is in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

Figure 8-19 (1) shows the state immediately after the prelude performance in the first half of the Super Reach has started and the chance-up performance targeting the active display has been executed. In this example, as shown in Figure 8-19 (1), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are redisplayed in their initial positions at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 after the chance-up performance has been executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-19(2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 so as to pass through the display position of the effect (for example, title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern) that is the target of the chance-up effect. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-19(1) and (2), before the dialogue effect starts, the effect display is performed such that the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move so as to pass through the display position (or the position where it is scheduled to be displayed) of the dialogue image 030IWG20. With this configuration, when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectations for the chance-up effect targeting the effect at the displayed position can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect are displayed in various positions such as the top, bottom, and bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 move to pass through these positions. This configuration allows players to focus on the positions to which the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 move and whether the effect displayed at those positions is the target of the chance-up effect.

In this example, when executing one chance up effect targeting one effect and then executing another chance up effect targeting another effect, the first chance up effect is executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed before the other chance up effect is executed (see FIG. 8-4). This configuration allows for an interval between the first chance up effect and the other chance up effect, making each stand out, and also ensures a period of time during which the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) to (2).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 have a lower display priority than the effect images (e.g., active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern, etc.) related to the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect, and are displayed on a lower layer than them. This configuration allows attention to be drawn to the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect. Note that, without being limited to this configuration, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 may be displayed on a lower layer than the effect images (e.g., decorative pattern) related to some of the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect, and displayed on a higher layer than the effect images (e.g., active display and dialogue display) related to the other effects when moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed during the execution of a super reach, and are displayed with a higher display priority than the performance images related to the super reach (for example, the character images related to the outpost performance), but when the chance-up performance is not being performed, they are displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of at least the central part of the performance image related to the super reach. Specifically, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, rather than moving in the center of the display area, and are not displayed superimposed on the face part, etc., of the character image related to the outpost performance. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 from obstructing the super reach (outpost performance) while still displaying them.

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (fake) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (3), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (3), when the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 is displayed, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move closer to the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-19 (2) and (3), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move at a slow speed when the effect to be used has not been specified (or when the chance up teasing effect is not being executed), and at a high speed when it has been specified (or when the chance up teasing effect is being executed). This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the chance up teasing effect or the effect that is the target of the chance up effect.

Next, an effect display begins in which the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks, but as shown in FIG. 8-19 (4), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11) is not displayed and the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 is erased. At this time, a "?" is displayed next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and mini-character A image 030IWC10 to indicate that the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 has been erased. With this configuration, it becomes clear that the executed chance-up teasing effect is a chance-up teasing effect (fake).

When the chance-up teasing effect (fake) ends, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed again in their initial positions at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5. In this example, they are displayed in the same initial position after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) and after the chance-up teasing effect (fake) is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5). This configuration makes it easy to understand that the chance-up teasing effect (fake) has ended, and conveys the meaning of starting afresh. Also, by displaying them again in their initial positions, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to effect control from increasing.

In this example, the keyhole (suggestive) image 030IWG13 and the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 can only be displayed once in response to the same effect. For example, if a chance-up teasing effect (or chance-up teasing effect (false)), which teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display will be executed, has been executed once, the chance-up teasing effect targeting the dialogue display will not be executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed thereafter. This configuration makes it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

The mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 may be configured so that a portion of them extends outside the display area (i.e., a portion of them is not displayed) when they are moved along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. With this configuration, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 can be flexibly moved and displayed in accordance with the performance images related to other performances.

For example, when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, effects that are not subject to the chance-up effect may not be executed. With this configuration, attention can be drawn to the effects that are executed when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this example, since the chance up effect can be executed multiple times, it may be possible to make it possible to recognize the number of times it has been executed. For example, when the first chance up effect is executed, an effect image resembling a blue flame may be displayed at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, when the second chance up effect is executed, the effect image may change to green, and when the third chance up effect is executed, the effect image may change to red. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that a chance up has occurred even after the chance up effect has ended and the effect image has been erased.

Next, we will explain the keyhole (suggested) image and keyhole (real) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. Figure 8-20 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of keyhole (real) images for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in this example, there are multiple types of effects that are the target of the chance-up effect, and the display size of the effect image for each effect is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (1) and (3), the dialogue display has a smaller display size than the title display. In this example, the chance-up effect is executed in a manner in which a keyhole (real) image is displayed in the position where the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the display size of the keyhole (real) image is configured to differ depending on the effect that is the target.

For example, the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the dialogue image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) has a smaller display size than the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1). This configuration allows the player to predict the effect that will be the target of the chance-up effect from the position where the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 is displayed, thereby increasing interest, and by displaying the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 at a display size appropriate for the effect that will be targeted, a natural effect can be achieved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the keyhole image is materialized, the silhouette of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed at a common size regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. Then, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a display size that corresponds to the type of effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the animation until the keyhole is materialized, and to prevent the amount of data related to effect control from increasing.

As explained above, this feature section 030IW discloses the gaming machine configurations shown in means 1 to means 29 below.

(Means 1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and includes a suggestion performance execution means that suggests that the machine is controlled to the favorable state and is capable of executing multiple types of suggestion performances that differ in expectation level depending on the performance mode (e.g., a performance that displays a title display in a predetermined mode, a performance that displays an active display in a predetermined mode, a dialogue performance that displays a dialogue display in a predetermined mode, a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern in a predetermined mode, etc.), and a special image display performance execution means that can display a special image (e.g., a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12), and by using the displayed special image, a suggestion performance that is being executed in one performance mode can be changed to a different performance mode. and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a chance-up effect in which the display color of the active display is changed from a normal color (white) to blue) that changes the display mode to one with a higher expectation than the normal color (white). The special effect execution means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11) when the suggestion effect is being executed, and executes a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (for example, displays a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH or a decorative pattern, and executes a chance-up effect in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 and rotates. See Figs. 8-15(9) to (15), Figs. 8-17(9) to 8-18(17), etc.). With such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, it is possible to enhance the effect of the performance by providing a story related to the special image, and to increase interest.

(Means 2) The special response image is displayed in the approximate center of the performance image related to the suggested performance being executed (for example, see FIG. 8-12 (5) and FIG. 8-14 (7)). At the timing when the special response image is displayed, a special performance targeting a suggested performance other than the suggested performance corresponding to the special response image is not executed (for example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, a chance-up performance targeting the dialogue display is not executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the suggested performance that is the target of the special performance, and to draw attention to the timing at which the special response image is displayed.

(Means 3) The special response image can be displayed only once in response to the same suggestive effect (for example, if a chance-up teasing effect (or chance-up teasing effect (false)) that teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display will be executed has been executed once, the chance-up teasing effect targeting the dialogue display will not be executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed thereafter). Such a configuration makes it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 4) When the presentation mode of the suggestive effect changes due to a special effect, the presentation mode after the change differs depending on the timing of the change (for example, the later the chance-up effect is executed, the more likely it is to change to a more advantageous presentation mode. See Figures 8-3 and 8-8). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the special effect will be executed, and to prevent players who had high hopes for the timing of the change from being disappointed.

(Means 5) A display teasing effect execution means is provided that can execute a display teasing effect (e.g., a chance-up teasing effect) that teases whether or not a special corresponding image is to be displayed, and the display teasing effect execution means can execute the display teasing effect in a common manner regardless of where the special corresponding image is displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-14 (2) to (5) and Fig. 8-16 (2) to (5), even if the target effects are different, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed in a close-up across the entire screen and then displayed in a common manner that is reduced). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a special corresponding image is to be displayed, i.e., whether or not a special effect will be executed, and to draw attention to which suggestion effect is the target of the chance-up effect.

(Means 6) When a special image is used in a special effect, it is displayed at a larger display size than the special corresponding image and then displayed so as to act on the special corresponding image while shrinking (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-15 (9) to (12) and Fig. 8-17 (9) to (12), the key image 030IWG12 is displayed moving from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back, so it is initially displayed at a larger display size than the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then displayed so as to rotate while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away).) With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image acting on the special corresponding image, and the effect of the special effect can be enhanced.

(Means 7) The special effect execution means can execute a special effect multiple times, and can vary the execution time depending on the special effect being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), a chance-up effect that targets a decorative pattern has a longer execution time than a dialogue display or a chance-up effect that targets a dialogue display. With such a configuration, various special effects can be executed at an appropriate execution time, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

(Means 8) When the presentation mode is changed by a special effect, the suggestive effect takes a longer time to execute than when the presentation mode is not changed by the special effect (for example, as shown in Figures 8-4 (A) and (B), the presentation execution time T11 of a dialogue effect whose presentation mode is changed by a chance-up effect is longer than the presentation execution time T12 of a dialogue effect whose presentation mode is not changed by a chance-up effect). With such a configuration, when a special effect is executed, a period for executing the special effect and its corresponding suggestive effect can be secured.

(Means 9) The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a first suggestive performance (e.g., a performance that displays a title display) and a second suggestive performance (e.g., a performance that displays a dialogue display) that is smaller in display size than the first suggestive performance, and the special performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance in a manner in which a special corresponding image is displayed at a position where a performance image related to the suggestive performance is displayed when the suggestive performance is being executed (e.g., a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position where the title image 030IWG21 is displayed or where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed), and When the target suggestive effect is the first suggestive effect, the special corresponding image is displayed in a first display size corresponding to the display size of the first suggestive effect, and when the target suggestive effect is the second suggestive effect, the special corresponding image is displayed in a second display size corresponding to the display size of the second suggestive effect, the second display size being smaller than the first display size (for example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the dialogue image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) has a smaller display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by allowing the player to predict the target suggestive effect from the position where the special corresponding image is displayed, and it is possible to create a natural effect by displaying the special corresponding image in a display size suitable for the target effect.

(Means 10) The suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (e.g., a performance that displays a dialogue display) in which a performance image is displayed at a first position, and a special suggestion performance (e.g., a performance that displays a decorative pattern) in which a performance image is displayed at a second position (e.g., a position closer to the top end of the display area of the image display device 5) that is closer to the edge of the display area of the display means than the first position, and when the specific suggestion performance is executed, the special performance execution means displays a special corresponding image at approximately the center position of the performance image displayed at the first position (e.g., the As shown in FIG. 8-16(7), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at approximately the center of the dialogue image 030IWG20, and when a special suggestion effect is executed, the special response image is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area of the display means from the center position of the effect image displayed in the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16(7), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the center position (the position corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R). With such a configuration, the special response image can be displayed appropriately according to the characteristics of the target suggestion effect.

(Means 11) The special effects include notification effects that notify the player that the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect will change by displaying a special image in a common display position regardless of the position where the special corresponding image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Pending rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed). Such a configuration makes it easier to recognize that the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect will change due to the special effect.

(Means 12) The special response image is not displayed when the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect in the special effect changes (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15) and Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed when the active display or decorative pattern mode changes). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the change in presentation mode of the suggestive effect.

(Means 13) The special image display means displays the special image in a manner that moves so as to pass through the display position of the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect during the period before the special effect is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1) to (4) and Fig. 8-19 (1) to (2), during the period before the chance-up effect that targets the dialogue effect is executed, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move so as to pass through the position where the dialogue image related to the dialogue effect is displayed (or the position where it is scheduled to be displayed). With such a configuration, when the special image is displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectations for the execution of a special effect that targets the suggestive effect at the position where the special image is displayed can be increased, and interest can be improved.

(Means 14) When a special image is used, the special image display means moves and displays the special image to the display position of the target suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (5) and FIG. 8-16 (5), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move to the display position of the active display AH that is the target of the chance-up effect or to the decorative pattern display area). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special effect and the target suggestive effect.

(Means 15) The special image has a lower display priority than the effect image related to the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14) and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 have a lower display priority than the title display, active display, dialogue display, and decorative pattern, and are displayed in a lower layer than those). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect.

(Means 16) The special effect execution means can execute one special effect targeted at one suggestion effect, and then execute another special effect targeted at another suggestion effect, and the other special effect is executed after the first special effect has been executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to set an interval between the one special effect and the other special effect to make them stand out, and also to ensure a period of time during which the special image is displayed in a moving manner.

(Means 17) The speed at which the special image moves is faster when the suggestive effect to be used is specified than when it is not specified (for example, as shown in Figures 8-19 (2) and (3), the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move at a slow speed when the effect to be used is not specified, and at a high speed when it is specified). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect to be used.

(Means 18) When the special image is displayed and moved, an additional image is added, and the additional image is also displayed and moved, and when a special effect is executed, the additional image operates (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (8), Fig. 8-16 (1) to (8), Fig. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 is displayed and moved together with the mini key image 030IWG10, and when a chance-up effect is executed, the character A image 030IWC10 throws the key image 030IWG12 into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and to enhance the effect of the special effect.

(Means 19) The special image is displayed in a manner that moves around the additional image, and the movement stops when the special effect is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (6), Fig. 8-16 (1) to (6), and Fig. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves in a manner that moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and stops its movement when the chance-up effect is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and to enhance the effect of the special effect.

(Means 20) The special image and additional image are displayed during the execution of a specific effect (e.g., a Super Reach) that suggests that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, and are displayed with a higher display priority than the effect images related to the specific effect (e.g., as shown in Figures 8-12 (1) to (4), the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed with a higher display priority than the character images related to the outpost effect in the first half of the Super Reach), and are displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of at least the central part of the effect image related to the specific effect when the specific effect is being executed but the special effect is not being executed (e.g., as shown in Figures 8-12 (1) to (4) and Figure 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than moving in the center of the display area, and are not displayed superimposed on the face part, etc., of the character image related to the outpost effect). This configuration makes it possible to display special images and additional images without interfering with specific effects.

(Means 21) A special suggestion effect execution means is provided that can execute a first special suggestion effect (for example, a chance up teasing effect (true)) that suggests that a special effect will be executed and that the special effect will be executed after the effect, and a second special suggestion effect (for example, a chance up teasing effect (false)) that suggests that a special effect will be executed and that the special effect will not be executed after the effect, and the special image is displayed again at the initial position after the second special suggestion effect is executed (for example, it is displayed at a common initial position after the chance up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) and after the chance up teasing effect (false) is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5)). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that the second special suggestion effect has ended, and it is possible to express the meaning of starting afresh. In addition, by displaying it again at the initial position, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to the effect control from increasing.

(Means 22) The special effect execution means can execute a special effect multiple times, and while executing one special effect targeting one suggestion effect, it does not execute other special effects targeting other suggestion effects (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special effect being executed.

(Means 23) The effect images (e.g., decorative patterns) related to at least some of the suggestive effects among the multiple types of suggestive effects have a higher display priority than the special images, even when the special images act on the special corresponding images (see, for example, FIG. 8-15 (9)). With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure visibility of some suggestive effects in any situation. In addition, for effect images related to other suggestive effects (e.g., images that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue or title displays), a lower display priority than the special images when the special images act on the special corresponding images can be used to realize realistic effects and enhance the presentation effect.

(Means 24) The special effect execution means can display a specific image when executing a special effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" are displayed together with an effect image covering the performance image related to the outpost performance), and can execute a special effect by a first performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the target suggestive effect when the specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), a pattern in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the display of the character and "Pattern Rank Up" remains), and a second performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the target suggestive effect at a time other than when the specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15), a pattern in which the appearance of the active display changes after the display of the character and "Pending Rank Up" is erased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the performance mode of the suggestive effect changes by displaying a specific image, and it is possible to execute a special effect suitably by a performance pattern according to the target suggestive effect.

(Means 25) When a special effect is executed by the first effect pattern, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a special effect is executed by the second effect pattern (for example, a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the expectation can be varied depending on the flashiness of the effect pattern, thereby increasing interest.

(Means 26) As the specific image, it is possible to identify which suggestive performance has changed in its presentation mode, and an image different from the presentation image related to the suggestive performance is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the text display "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" is displayed). With such a configuration, it is easy to recognize which suggestive performance has changed in its presentation mode.

(Means 27) The special effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect (e.g., a super reach) that suggests whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the specific image displayed during the execution of the special effect is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image related to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Hold rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed together with an effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost effect), and the suggestive effect includes a suggestive effect that is covered by a specific image and a suggestive effect that is not covered by a specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), the active display AH is covered, while as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), the decorative pattern is not covered), and the suggestive effect that is not covered by a specific image has a higher expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state than the suggestive effect that is covered by a specific image (for example, a chance up effect in which the state of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance up effect in which the state of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-7). This configuration allows the level of expectation to vary depending on the extravagance of the special effects, increasing interest.

(Means 28) The special effects of the first presentation pattern are more likely to be executed later in one variable display period than the special effects of the second presentation pattern (for example, a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes is executed later than a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute special effects according to the period when the player's expectations are high.

(Means 29) When a special effect is being executed by the first effect pattern, one specific image is switched to another specific image for display (for example, after an image of character A is displayed as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to (14), an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed as shown in Fig. 8-17 (15) to Fig. 8-18 (17)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of a highly anticipated special effect.

Figure 9 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched from a specified ball launching device and hit into this gaming area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. In the example shown in FIG. 9, they are provided on the right side of the game area. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can each variably display special symbols as multiple types of special identification information. Special symbols are also called "special symbols." The variable display of special symbols is also called "special symbol game." Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using 7-segment LEDs or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a display of multiple types of special symbols that can be changed. For other symbols such as performance symbols, small symbols, and normal symbols, "variable display" also means a display of multiple types of symbols that can be changed. Performance symbols are also called decorative symbols or ornamental symbols. Variable display is also called variable display, or simply "change." Changes include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, and deforming, enlarging, or reducing one or more symbols. Changes may include a mode of displaying a certain symbol in a flashing manner. In the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, multiple types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of any symbol, a predetermined symbol is displayed as a stop display as a display result at the end. Stop display is also called derived display, or simply derived. The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in a variable display is also called the final stop symbol or the final symbol. The final stop symbol in a special symbol game is also called the final special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display result. The display result of the special symbol is also called the special symbol display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol change time, which is the change time of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display time.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern." The special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game." A special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2, a normal symbol display 20 is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 9, it is provided on the left side of the game area. The normal symbol display 20 can perform variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are also called "normal symbols". The variable display of normal symbols is also called "normal symbol game". The normal symbol display 20 is configured using 7-segment LEDs and the like. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which some or all of the multiple LEDs are lit, or a pattern in which all of the multiple LEDs are turned off. The final stop symbol in the normal symbol game is also called a confirmed normal symbol. The display result of the normal symbol is also called a normal symbol display result. The execution time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol game is also called a normal symbol fluctuation time.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 may be configured using any of the following devices, for example: an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (electro luminescence), a projector, and a screen. Alternatively, the image display device 5 may be configured using a mechanism capable of forming any image. The image display device 5 is capable of displaying various types of performance images. Furthermore, the image display device 5 is not limited to performance images, and can display any control-related image, such as an inspection image or a setting image.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the performance pattern is performed in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game. The performance pattern is a display pattern showing numbers or the like, and is a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern or the normal pattern. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 9, the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are provided, and the performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner, for example, by scrolling or updating the performance pattern in the vertical direction in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game. The special game and the variable display of the performance pattern executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display. The synchronization of the variable display may be such that the timing at which the pattern starts to change and the timing at which the change ends and the pattern is finally stopped and displayed are common timing for different types of patterns. The final stop pattern in the variable display of the performance pattern is also referred to as the determined performance pattern, determined decoration pattern, or determined decoration pattern. The variable display of the performance symbols is synchronized with the first and second special symbol games, so the variable display time of the performance symbols is the same as the special symbol fluctuation time.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed may be provided. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding to the variable display. The display area for displaying the pending display is also referred to as a pending display area. The display area for displaying the active display is also referred to as an active display area. The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories. Above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B shown in FIG. 9, a first pending display device 25A and a second pending display device 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display device 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of LEDs that are lit. The second reserved display 25B displays the second reserved memory number by the number of lit LEDs. A regular pattern reserved display 25C, which is composed of multiple LEDs, is provided above the regular pattern display 20 shown in FIG. 9. The regular pattern reserved display 25C displays the regular pattern reserved memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The regular pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number corresponding to the regular pattern game.

Below the image display device 5, there are provided a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B. The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning port that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, three, are paid out, and the first start condition for executing the first special game can be established. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second start winning port that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric role solenoid 81 shown in FIG. 10 as a normal electric role. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-type role having a pair of movable wings, and when the normal electric role solenoid 81 is in an off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning port is in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter. When the variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state, it is also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state. When the normal electric role solenoid 81 is in an on state, the movable wing piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning port is in an open state where the game ball can enter. When the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, it is also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state. When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, three balls, are paid out, and the second start condition for executing the second special game can be established. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to one equipped with an electric tulip-type role, as long as it can be changed between a closed state and an open state.

The entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is also called the first start winning. The entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also called the second start winning. The game ball that enters the first start winning hole is detected by the first start winning hole switch 21A shown in FIG. 10. The game ball that enters the second start winning hole is detected by the second start winning hole switch 21B shown in FIG. 10. Based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the first reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the first special symbol display device 4A can variably display the special symbol as the first special symbol game. Based on the occurrence of the second start winning, the second reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the second special symbol game can variably display the special symbol as the second special symbol game.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in FIG. 9, general winning openings 10 are provided in two locations on the lower left of the game area. When a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example 10, are paid out.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first path and a second path are provided as flow paths for game balls to flow down. The first path is mainly provided in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The left area of the image display device 5 is also called the left game area or the left game area. The right area of the image display device 5 is also called the right game area or the right game area. The left game area and the right game area may be divided, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area or the arrangement of the game nails. Firing a game ball toward the left game area to make it flow down the first path is also called a left hit. Firing a game ball toward the right game area to make it flow down the second path is also called a right hit. The first path is also called a left hit path. The second path is also called a right hit path. The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared.

In response to the operation of a ball operating handle provided on the ball launching device, a game ball is launched from the ball launching device and launched into the game area. When a game ball launched into the game area is guided to the left game area and flows down the first path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide to the second path in the right game area. When a game ball launched into the game area is guided to the right game area and flows down the second path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide to the first path in the left game area.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on a first path in the left-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided on a second path in the right-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the second path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B may also allow game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B may be positioned so that game balls flowing down the second path in the right-side play area have an easier time entering than game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area.

The second path in the right game area is provided with a passing gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50. The passing gate 41 forms a passing area through which game balls can pass. Game balls that pass through the passing gate 41 are detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 10. When a game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the number of normal reserved memories can be added and updated, and variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 20 can be executed as a normal symbol game.

The special variable winning ball device 50 is a special electric device that forms a large winning port that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a large winning port solenoid 82. The upper part of the special variable winning ball device 50 is formed with a guide passage with a passage width in the front and rear direction that allows the game ball to pass through. This guide path slopes downward from the right side to the left side, and walls are provided on the front and back sides of the extended passage. In the center of the guide passage, a role entrance that serves as the large winning port is formed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a movable member 52 that can move in the front and rear directions is provided as a large winning port opening and closing member at a position where the large winning port can be opened and closed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a fixed member 53 that forms a fixed passage is provided in the part of the guide passage where the large winning port is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by the large prize opening solenoid 82 and can move forward and backward to open and close the role entrance which becomes the large prize opening. In the special variable prize ball device 50, the game ball that enters the inside from the large prize opening is detected by the count switch 23. Inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a V prize area 51 which is a specific area is provided as a prize area through which the game ball can pass. In addition, inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a normal area different from the V prize area 51 is provided. At the top of the V prize area 51, a plate-shaped distribution member which can switch the V prize area 51 between an open state and a closed state is provided as a V prize opening opening and closing member. The distribution member is driven by the specific area solenoid 83 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V prize area 51. When the V prize area 51 is in an open state, the game ball can pass through it, and when it is in a closed state, the game ball cannot pass through it. Game balls that pass through the V winning area 51 are detected by the specific area switch 24. Game balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 pass through the normal area. Game balls that pass through the V winning area 51 and game balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 but pass through the normal area are both detected by the discharge switch 26 and then discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 50.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the game balls, and numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes. Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for lighting up the game effects are provided around the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball operation handle that is operated by a player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the playing area using the ball launching device. The ball operation handle is also called an operation knob. At a specified position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, there is provided a ball supply tray that holds gaming balls paid out as prize balls or gaming balls lent out by a specified ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. The ball supply tray is also called the upper tray. Below the upper tray, there is provided a prize ball storage tray where prize balls paid out when the upper tray is full flow down and are stored. The prize ball storage tray is also called the lower tray.

A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A can be held by the player and tilted, and is provided with a trigger button that the player can push and pull. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. 10. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B shown in FIG. 10. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used as detection means for detecting the player's operation and other actions, but other detection means may also be used.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display device 20. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being executed, the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately, so the normal game based on the passage is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number, for example, "4". In the normal game, when a specific normal symbol, such as a normal winning symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal winning". On the other hand, when a normal symbol other than the normal winning symbol, such as a normal losing symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal losing". In the case of "normal winning", an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period. At this time, the second starting winning port is opened.

When a game ball passes through and enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game can be started by the first special pattern display device 4A. When a game ball passes through and enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game can be started by the second special pattern display device 4B. Note that, during the period when the special pattern game is being executed or during the period when the game ball is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state, even if the game ball enters the start winning hole and a start winning occurs, the special pattern game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately, so the special pattern game based on the start winning is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number, for example, "4". In the special pattern game, when a specific special pattern such as a big win pattern is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern becomes "big win". In contrast, when a predetermined special pattern, such as a small win pattern, that is different from a big win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern is "small win". Also, when a special pattern, such as a miss pattern, that is different from a big win pattern or a small win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern is "miss". Furthermore, when a special pattern, such as a time-saving pattern, that is different from a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern may be "time-saving". The special pattern may not include a time-saving pattern. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include "time-saving".

In the special game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot entry port formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. The open state at this time continues until the timing of the passage of a predetermined period, such as 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, or the timing when the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot entry port reaches a predetermined number, whichever comes first. The predetermined period during which the jackpot entry port can be controlled to be in an open state is the upper limit period during which the jackpot entry port can be opened in one round, and is also called the open upper limit period. One cycle in which the jackpot entry port is in an open state in the jackpot game state is called a round or round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number is reached, such as 15 times or 2 times. In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain prize balls by entering the game ball into the jackpot entry port. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit open period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

When the display result of the special pattern is a "jackpot", it includes multiple jackpot types. For example, the opening mode of the jackpot entry port, such as the number of rounds and the maximum opening period, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, such as the normal state, time-saving state, or probability change state, are set to multiple different types, and a jackpot type is specified corresponding to each setting. The multiple jackpot types may include some or all of the jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, jackpot types that allow few prize balls to be obtained, or jackpot types that allow almost no prize balls to be obtained, or may include jackpot types with the same number of prize balls that can be obtained. Controlling to a jackpot game state based on the display result of the special pattern being a "jackpot" is also called a pattern jackpot, a jackpot with a special pattern, a variable display jackpot, or a direct hit jackpot.

In the special game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to a small hit game state. In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small hit game state, the large winning opening may be opened in the same opening state as the large winning game state in some large hit types. The large winning opening may be opened in the same opening state by having the same number of openings and opening period. Alternatively, in the small hit game state, the large winning opening may be opened in an opening state different from the large hit game state. As with the large hit type, multiple small hit types may be included even when the display result of the special pattern becomes "small hit". The large hit type and the small hit type are also collectively referred to as the hit type. The operation of opening and closing the large winning opening in the small hit game state is also called the starting operation. When the special variable winning ball device 50 is in a small winning state, the special variable winning ball device 50's role entrance, which is the large winning opening, is opened, and when the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, the conditions for a big win are met, and control to the big win game state is possible. When the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 in a small winning game state, control to the big win game state based on the occurrence of a V winning is also called a small winning via big win.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-changing state in accordance with the jackpot type. In addition, in the special pattern game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes "time-saving", the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state but is controlled to a time-saving state. The time-saving state is a game state in which the second special pattern game by the second special pattern display device 4B is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A game state in which the second special pattern game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to pass through and enter the second start winning hole than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball is more likely to pass through the second start winning hole is also called base control. The base control in the normal state is also called normal base control or low base control. The base control in the time-saving state includes high base control. In addition to the high base control, the time-saving state may include medium base control. The medium base control is a base control that makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than the low base control, but makes it harder for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than the high base control. The game state in which the medium base control is performed is also called the medium base state. The game state in which the high base control is performed is also called the high base state. The high base control is also called the high opening control.

In the normal state, the medium base state, and the high base state, it is possible for the time-saving pattern to be displayed as a stopped result of the display of the special pattern. However, in the medium base state and the high base state, even if the time-saving pattern is displayed as a stopped result of the display of the special pattern, base control based on the time-saving pattern is not performed, and new control to transition to the medium base state or the high base state is not initiated. In the time-saving state, it is possible to perform time-saving control that shortens the average variable display time more than in the normal state. For this reason, the time-saving state is also called the time-shortening state.

The time-saving state is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols, especially the second special symbol, is improved, so it is included in the special states that are advantageous to players and different from the jackpot game state. When the game state is the probability variable state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variable control is possible in which the probability of the display result being a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. As a result, the probability variable state is also called a probability variable state. The probability variable state is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols is improved and it is easy to become a "jackpot", so it is included in the special states that are advantageous to players and different from the jackpot game state. The time-saving state and probability variable state continue until one of the predetermined end conditions is met first, such as the execution of a specified number of special symbol games or the control being made to the next jackpot game state. The end condition is that the specified number of special symbol games have been executed, also called the number-cut. The number-cut time-saving state is also called the number-cut time-cut. The number-cut probability variable state is also called the number-cut probability variable.

The normal game state is a game state that is not included in advantageous states such as a big win game state that is advantageous to the player, predetermined states such as a small win game state, or special states such as a time-saving state or a probability change state. The normal state is a game state in which the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal win" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot" are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. The initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 is the control state after the initial setting process is performed without performing the specified recovery process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed.

The state in which the probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a probability variable state as a gaming state.

After the small win game state ends, there are cases where the game state is controlled to a big win game state based on the occurrence of a V win, and cases where a V win does not occur and the game state before the small win game state remains unchanged. However, when the display result of the special game becomes a "small win" and a specified number of special games are played in the number cutoff, the control of the time-saving state and the probability change state may end and the game state may return to the normal state. Note that the pachinko game machine 1 may not include a small win game state as a game state. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include a "small win".

When a time-saving condition based on the number of times the variable display is executed is established, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state. Such a time-saving state is also called a rescue time-saving state. The time-saving condition may be a condition that can be established when, after the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, after a jackpot occurs, or after the display result of the special game becomes "time-saving," control to a new jackpot game state or time-saving state is not performed even if a specific number of variable displays are executed.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. These effects include effects that notify the progress of the game and effects that liven up the game. These effects include displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, vibrating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, and may be executed using any effect device.

The effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game include variable display of the effect symbols. In response to the start of the first special game or the second special game, the variable display of the effect symbols is started in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5. When the determined special symbol that is the display result in the first special game or the second special game is stopped and displayed, the determined effect symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. The determined effect symbol is composed of a combination of three effect symbols corresponding to the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the effect symbols, the display mode in the variable display of the effect symbols may become a reach mode. The reach mode is a mode in which the effect symbols that have stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute part of a jackpot combination and the fluctuation of the effect symbols that have not yet stopped continues. When the display pattern of the variable display of the performance symbols becomes a reach pattern, it is said that a reach has been achieved.

When the variable display of the performance pattern becomes a reach state, a reach performance can be executed. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute multiple types of reach performance so that the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" varies when the performance state differs. The rate of a "jackpot" corresponding to the performance state is also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate. Reach performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach. In addition, it may include a short reach and a long reach, which has a longer execution time than a short reach, corresponding to the execution time of the reach performance.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed performance pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed as a display result of the performance pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same performance pattern, such as a performance pattern showing the number "7", is displayed stopped on a predetermined effective line in the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd-numbered performance patterns, such as a performance pattern showing the number "7", may be displayed stopped. In the case of a "non-probability jackpot" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even-numbered performance patterns, such as a performance pattern showing the number "6", may be displayed stopped. A "non-probability jackpot" is also called a "normal jackpot". In this case, the odd-numbered performance patterns are also called probability jackpot patterns. The even-numbered performance symbols are also called non-variable symbols or normal symbols. After a reach state occurs with a non-variable symbol, an advance performance may be executed that ultimately results in a "variable jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed performance pattern that is a predetermined small win combination is displayed as a display result of the performance pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same performance pattern, such as a performance pattern showing a number other than "7", may be displayed stopped on a predetermined valid line in the "left", "middle", and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A common fixed performance pattern may be displayed stopped when the display result of the special game is a "big win" and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss", the display result may be displayed as a stop without the variable display of the performance symbols becoming a reach state. In this case, the fixed performance symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as a stop as the display result of the performance symbols. A display result in which the fixed performance symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as a stop without becoming a reach state is also called a non-reach miss. When the display result of the special game is a "miss", the variable display of the performance symbols may become a reach state, and the display result may be displayed as a stop after the reach performance is executed. In this case, the display result of the performance symbols may be displayed as a stop with a fixed performance symbol of the reach combination that is not a big hit combination or a small hit combination. A display result in which the fixed performance symbol of the reach combination is displayed as a stop after becoming a reach state is also called a reach miss.

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include variable display compatible displays such as reserved displays and active displays. In addition, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability can be executed while the performance pattern is variable displayed. The preview effect may include a variable preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability corresponding to the variable display before execution whose execution is on hold. The look-ahead preview effect may be capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of a variable display compatible display such as reserved displays and active displays to a mode different from normal.

On the screen of the image display device 5, it may be possible to temporarily stop the performance symbols during the variable display of the performance symbols, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive performance in which one variable display appears as multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive performance may be set so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the number of times the variable display is resumed after the performance symbols are temporarily stopped is large than when the number of times the number is small. In the variable display of the performance symbols, there may be cases where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed before the reach state is reached, and cases where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed after the reach state is reached. In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols, it may be possible to execute the pseudo consecutive performance at multiple times.

During control of the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot performance can be executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the number of rounds and an advancement performance to suggest or notify that the advantage of the jackpot gaming state will improve. During control of the small jackpot gaming state, a small jackpot performance can be executed to notify the player of the small jackpot gaming state. By executing a common performance during control of the jackpot gaming state and during control of the small jackpot gaming state, it may be possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize whether the current gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small jackpot gaming state.

In a non-playing state where a special game or the like is not being played and no game is progressing, a demonstration effect image can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A demonstration effect image is also called a demo image. The display of a demo image is also called a demo display. The effect produced by the demo display is also called a customer waiting demo effect.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, and the like, as shown in Fig. 10. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The progress of the game includes the execution of various games and transitions of game states, such as the execution of special games with reserved management, the execution of regular games with reserved management, big win game state, small win game state, time-saving state, and probability change state. The main board 11 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and can be configured to include a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. The ROM 101, the RAM 102, and a part or all of the random number circuit 104 may be configured to be external to the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured to be built into the game control microcomputer 100. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The various switches for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, start port switches such as a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric role solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the ROM 101 is a non-volatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data stored in the ROM 101 includes table data constituting tables used for variation patterns, performance control commands, and various other settings, judgments, and decisions. The RAM 102 is a temporary storage device that provides a stack for saving work areas and data used for game control. The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that stores the contents of a part or all of the memory area so that they can be restored within a specified period even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes a memory area that can store various data used for game control, such as a counter, a timer, a buffer, and a storage area for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 can control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 by executing a process corresponding to the program stored in the ROM 101. The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the progress of a game in an updateable manner. The random numbers used when controlling the progress of a game are also called game random numbers. Some or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the CPU 103. The I/O 105 includes an input port to which various signals are input, and an output port to which various signals are output. The various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110. The various signals output from the output port of I/O 105 may include signals for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reserve display device 25A, the second reserve display device 25B, the normal reserve display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals for driving the normal electric role solenoid 81, the large prize opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc.

The main board 11 transmits, as part of the operation of controlling the progress of the game by the game control microcomputer 100, a presentation control command according to the progress of the game to the presentation control board 12 in a transmittable manner. The presentation control command is a command that specifies or notifies the progress of the game. The presentation control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control command may include commands that specify various determination results on the main board 11, such as the display result of the special game, the type of win, and the variation pattern, commands that specify the status of the game, such as the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, and the game status, and commands that specify the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and controlling the performance based on the received performance control commands. The performances that can be controlled by the performance control board 12 include various performances according to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, and also various notifications such as error notifications and notifications of power outage recovery. The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for controlling the execution of performance together with the display control unit 123. This processing is for implementing the various functions of the performance control board 12, and includes determining the performance to be executed. The performance control CPU 120 uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data from various tables, and also uses the RAM 122 as its main memory. The performance control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and may be a signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and controls the execution of mainly display-related effects based on instructions to execute effects from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14. The sound designation signal designates the sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal designates the on/off state of the game effect lamp 9. The supply of the sound designation signal and the lamp signal enables the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on or off of the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying a signal for operating the movable body 32 to a motor or solenoid of the movable body 32, or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32. A driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided separately from the performance control board 12.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the execution of various performances. The random numbers used when controlling the execution of performances are also called performance random numbers. The performance random numbers may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the performance control CPU 120. The I/O 125 includes, for example, an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output port of the I/O 125 may include an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for a sound designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14.

The sound control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on a sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on a lamp signal from the display control unit 123, and turns the game effect lamp 9 on or off in the manner designated by the lamp signal. In this way, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on a signal from the display control unit 123. Note that the control of the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp, such as the supply of the sound designation signal and the lamp signal, and the control of the movable body 32, such as the supply of a signal to operate the movable body 32, may be performed in part or in whole by the performance control CPU 120. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the configuration example shown in FIG. 10, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or, unlike the configuration example shown in FIG. 10, one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, DC 12V or DC 5V, etc.). The pachinko game machine 1 can switch between starting and ending the power supply by operating the power switch 91. The switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 takes in a reset signal, a power off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power-off reference time or longer. The clear signal is turned on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process.

Figure 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. When the game control main process shown in Figure 11 is started, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). As a result, other processes will not be executed until interrupts are permitted. Next, the built-in device register is set (step S902). In setting the built-in device register, for example, a built-in device register setting table is used to store the built-in device register setting value at the specified built-in device address. The built-in device register may be, for example, a PTC (Programmable Timer Counter) as a timer counter that is a timer circuit, a random number circuit 104, an input port of the I/O 105, a serial communication circuit, an RWM access control circuit, or the like, provided in correspondence with various circuits and electronic components. In addition, the stack pointer may be initially set, an interrupt vector may be set, and so on.

Next, the RWM check process (step S903) is executed to determine whether or not a predetermined recovery condition is satisfied (step S904). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the storage contents in the RAM 102 as the backup RAM are normal. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S904 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 as the backup RAM for game control. The RWM check process in step S903 includes a checksum calculation process, and the checksum data obtained as a result of the process is compared with the storage data in the checksum buffer, and if the two data match, it is determined that the storage contents in the RAM 102 are normal. In step S904, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met based on the results of checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and data errors, etc., performed by the RWM check process in step S903.

When the recovery condition is met (step S904; Yes), recovery settings are made. The recovery settings include the specification of a backup command transmission table (step S905) and a backup setting table (step S906). The backup command transmission table includes table data for transmitting a power outage recovery specification command to the performance control board 12, which specifies that recovery has been performed using backup data. The backup setting table includes table data used for initial setting of the work area when recovery has been performed using backup data. To specify a table, a value corresponding to the top address of the table stored in ROM 101 is stored in a general-purpose pointer or table pointer. The same applies to other tables.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S904; No), the initialization setting is performed. The initialization setting includes the RWM initial setting process (step S907), the designation of the initialization command transmission table (step S908), and the designation of the initialization setting table (step S909). The RWM initial setting process includes a process of initializing the work area by storing clear data in a predetermined area that becomes the work area in the RAM 102. The initialization command transmission table includes table data for transmitting a power-on designation command that designates that the initial setting has been performed at the time of power-on to the performance control board 12. The initialization setting table includes table data used for the initial setting of the work area when the initial setting has been performed at the time of power-on. For example, the initialization setting table includes table data for setting the count value of the specific count counter to the specific count initial value. The initialization setting table also includes table data for setting the storage value of the specific count command buffer to the specific count command upper limit value. The specific number of times is the number of times the variable display is executed, which is the time-saving condition that transitions the gaming state from the normal state to the time-saving state when a period of time continues in which the gaming state is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state or a time-saving state.

Then, command set processing (step S9010) and data set processing (step S9011) are executed. The command set processing includes a process for sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12 by storing command data specified in the command transmission table in the serial communication data register. The data set processing includes a process for storing a specified value at an address indicated by the table data using a data setting table specified by a pointer, and a process for clearing the memory contents of the address indicated by the table data.

Then, after executing the wait process (step S9012), a specific number of times command sending process (step S9013) is executed. The wait process waits until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, thereby ensuring that sub-boards such as the performance control board 12 can be started. The specific number of times command process is a process for sending a performance control command that specifies the count value of the specific number of times counter to the performance control board 12 when the power is turned on. The specific number of times counter is provided at a predetermined address in the RAM 102, and it is sufficient that it is capable of counting the remaining number of times until the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the specific number of times that corresponds to the time-saving condition.

Following the specific number of command transmission processes in step S9013, interrupt initial setting (step S9014) is performed to set the PTC counter output value so that a regular timer interrupt occurs at a predetermined time interval, for example, every 4 milliseconds, and loop processing begins. In this loop processing, interrupt prohibition (step S9015), random number update processing for determining initial value (step S9016), and interrupt permission (step S9017) are repeatedly executed. Thereafter, each time an interrupt request signal is sent from the PTC to the CPU 103, the CPU 103 becomes able to execute timer interrupt processing. This enables the CPU 103 to execute timer interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals, for example, every 4 milliseconds.

Figure 12 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. The CPU 103 can execute the game control timer interrupt process by receiving an interrupt request signal from the PTC and accepting the interrupt request. The game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 12 (A) includes a power cut process (step S9021), a switch process (step S9022), a main side error process (step S9023), a game random number update process (step S9024), a special symbol process process (step S9025), a normal symbol process process (step S9026), an information output process (step S9027), a prize ball process (step S9028), and a main side display control process (step S9029).

The power-off process in step S9021 includes a process of checking the power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 17 and judging whether a power-off has occurred. When a power-off occurs, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the checksum data is set in the checksum buffer, after which settings for when the power-off occurs, such as prohibiting RWM access, are performed. The switch process in step S9022 includes a process of judging whether a detection signal has been received from various switches input via the switch circuit 110, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The reception result of the detection signal is set in the switch-on buffer. The main-side error process in step S9023 includes a process of diagnosing an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1 and, if necessary, issuing a warning according to the diagnosis result. The game random number update process in step S9024 includes a process of updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

Figure 12 (B) shows an example of a random number for gaming. The random numbers for gaming include a random number MR1 for determining a special symbol, a random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol, a random number MR3 for determining an initial value of MR2, a random number MR4 for selecting a variation pattern type, a random number MR5 for determining a variation pattern, a random number MR6 for determining a winning normal symbol, and a random number MR7 for determining an initial value of MR6. The random number MR1 for determining a special symbol is used when determining the display result of a special symbol, such as whether or not the display result of a special symbol is a "big win" or whether or not the display result of a special symbol is a "small win". The random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol is used when selecting a confirmed special symbol from a plurality of special symbols, such as a big win symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "big win" or a small win symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "small win". The random number MR3 for determining the MR2 initial value is used to create the initial value of the random number MR2. The random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type is used to select the variation pattern type of the special pattern. The random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type. The random number MR6 for determining the normal pattern hit is used when determining the display result of the normal pattern, that is, whether or not the display result of the normal pattern is a "normal hit". The random number MR7 for determining the MR6 initial value is used to create the initial value of the random number MR6. The random number MR3 for determining the MR2 initial value and the random number MR7 for determining the MR6 initial value may be updated not only in the game random number update process of step S24, but also in the initial value determination random number update process of step S9016 shown in FIG. 11.

The variation pattern is determined by using the value of the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, from among one or more variation patterns included in the variation pattern type selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type, and the pattern to be used in the current variable display. The variation pattern specifies various variable setting items including the special pattern variation time, which is the execution time of the special pattern game, the state of the variable display of the performance pattern, and the performance content during the variable display of the performance pattern. The special pattern variation time is also the execution time for the variable display of the performance pattern. The state of the variable display of the performance pattern includes the presence or absence of a reach. The performance content during the variable display of the performance pattern includes the type of reach performance. The variation pattern is also called a variable display pattern. The variation pattern type is a group that includes one or more variation patterns that are classified in advance based on, for example, the performance state during the variable display of the performance pattern.

The special symbol process processing in step S9025 shown in FIG. 12(A) includes processing related to the variable display of special symbols and the game state, such as management of execution and reservation of special symbol games, control of the big win game state and small win game state, and control of the game state. The normal symbol process processing in step S9026 includes processing related to the variable display of normal symbols and state control of the second start winning port, such as management of execution and reservation of normal symbol games based on a detection signal from the gate switch 21, and control of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal hit". The information output processing in step S9027 sets the information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information such as big win information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. The big win information indicates the number of big wins, etc. The start information indicates the number of start wins, etc. The probability fluctuation information indicates the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc. The prize ball processing in step S9028 includes a prize ball command output counter addition process and a prize ball control process. The prize ball command output counter addition process uses a prize ball number table to determine whether the switch is on, and when on is detected, updates the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter. The prize ball control process selects a process corresponding to the prize ball process code and controls the prize balls based on the detection of the game ball so that they can be paid out. The main side display control process in step S9029 includes a display setting for the first special pattern and a display setting for the second special pattern. The display setting for the first special pattern is a setting for controlling the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A so that it can be updated by executing the special pattern control process. The display setting for the second special pattern is a setting for controlling the display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B so that it can be updated by executing the special pattern control process.

Figure 13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in Figure 12 (A) as the special symbol process. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning judgment process (step S101). The start winning judgment process includes a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the reserved memory number. When the occurrence of a start winning is detected, if the reserved memory number is less than the upper limit value, a random number value used to determine the display result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc. is extracted. The extracted random number value is stored as reserved information. In addition, a process of predicting the display result and the fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After updating the storage of the reserved information and the reserved memory number, a command setting is performed to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. With these command settings, the performance control command at the time of the initial winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the start winning determination process of step S101, the CPU 103 reads out the special symbol process code stored in a specified address in the RAM 102 (step S102). The special symbol process code can be updated to any of 00[H] to 0B[H] and is also called the special symbol process code. [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. The CPU 103 selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the special symbol process code (step S103). This makes it possible to control the progress of the game regarding the variable display of the special symbol.

Figure 13 (B) shows an example of processing that can be executed in response to a special symbol process code in the special symbol process processing. The special symbol process processing includes, as processing that can be executed in response to a special symbol process code, a normal special symbol process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 00 [H], a special symbol change process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 01 [H], a special symbol stop process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 02 [H], a pre-small win opening process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 03 [H], a small win opening process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 04 [H], and a special symbol stop process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 05 [H]. It includes a small win post-opening process corresponding to the special chart process code 06 [H], a small win discharge ball waiting process corresponding to the special chart process code 07 [H], a large win end process corresponding to the special chart process code 08 [H], a large win opening pre-opening process corresponding to the special chart process code 09 [H], a large win opening post-opening process corresponding to the special chart process code 0A [H], and a large win end process corresponding to the special chart process code 0B [H].

The normal special symbol processing includes a process capable of determining whether to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reserved information. The normal special symbol processing includes a process capable of determining whether the display result of the special symbol is a "big win" or a "small win", and further whether it is a "time reduction" based on the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol. The normal special symbol processing includes a process for determining the confirmed special symbol to be displayed in a stopped state in the variable display of the special symbol in response to the determination of the display result. The normal special symbol processing includes a process for determining the variable pattern. Thus, in the normal special symbol processing, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, various determinations and decisions (pre-determinations) regarding the variable display are made before the display result is derived and displayed, and the special symbol process code is updated to 01 [H].

When making various judgments and decisions based on random number values, the CPU 103 reads out and references various tables from ROM 101. The same applies to other judgments and decisions using random number values on the main board 11. Even if random number values are not used, the necessary tables may be read out and referenced from ROM 101 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, etc. On the performance control board 12, it is sufficient to read out and reference various tables from ROM 121 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, etc.

In the normal special symbol processing, the special symbol 2 priority consumption control may be performed, in which the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol. Alternatively, in the normal special symbol processing, the winning order consumption control may be performed, in which the start conditions for the special symbol game are established in accordance with the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning port and the second start winning port.

The special pattern change process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the special pattern starts changing on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, and judging whether the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed. When the special pattern change time has elapsed, a pattern stop time for stopping the display of the confirmed special pattern is set, the count values of various counters are updated, and the special pattern process code is updated to 02 [H]. The special pattern stop process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the special pattern stops changing on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, and judging whether the pattern stop time set in the special pattern change process has elapsed. When the pattern stop time has elapsed, the special pattern process code is updated and various settings are made according to the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the special pattern process code is updated to 08 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the special pattern process code is updated to 03 [H]. If the display result of the variable display is "time-saving" or "miss," the special chart process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H]. Also, if the display result of the variable display is "jackpot," a setting corresponding to the start of a jackpot game state is made. If the display result of the variable display is "small jackpot," a setting corresponding to the start of a small jackpot game state is made. If the display result of the variable display is "time-saving," a setting is made to control the game state to a time-saving state.

The small win pre-opening process performs settings to open the large prize opening in the small win game state based on the display result of the variable display being "small win", and updates the special chart process code to 04 [H]. The small win opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the large prize opening was opened in the small win game state and determining whether the small win opening time has elapsed. If the small win opening time has elapsed, the special chart process code is updated to 05 [H] along with settings to close the large prize opening. The small win post-opening process performs a prize winning detection for the large prize opening in the small win game state, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, updates the special chart process code to 06 [H]. The small win discharge ball waiting process includes a process of setting a large prize opening discharge ball error, determining whether the V prize area 51 has passed, and determining whether the discharge of the large prize opening has been completed. When it is determined that the large prize opening has been discharged, the special prize process code is updated to 07 [H] along with the settings before the small prize ends. The small prize end process includes a process for determining whether or not the V prize area 51 has been passed using the specific area passing flag. When a game ball has passed through the V prize area 51, the specific area passing flag is set to a designated value 01 [H] corresponding to the on state. When the specific area passing flag is on, the special prize process code is updated to 08 [H] along with the start of the large prize. When the specific area flag is off, the special prize process code is cleared along with the end of the small prize and updated to the initial value 00 [H].

The pre-opening process of the large prize opening performs settings to control the large prize opening to an open state, such as updating the large prize opening count counter and settings for when the large prize opening is opened, including the operation settings of the large prize opening, and updates the special chart process code to 09 [H]. The process during the opening of the large prize opening measures the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened in the jackpot game state, detects winning at the large prize opening, and updates the special chart process code to 0A [H] along with settings to close the large prize opening when the maximum number of winning balls at the large prize opening is reached or when the opening time for the jackpot has elapsed. The post-opening process of the large prize opening includes a process of determining the end of the time after the large prize opening is opened after setting the large prize opening ejection ball mismatch error, and determining the count value of the large prize opening opening count counter when it is determined that the opening has ended. If the count value of the large prize opening counter is less than the maximum large prize opening opening count, the special chart process code is updated to 08 [H], and the next round can be started. If the count value of the large prize opening counter is the maximum large prize opening opening count, the special chart process code is updated to 0B [H] along with the settings at the end of the opening, including the setting of the jackpot end presentation time. The jackpot end process includes a process for determining whether the jackpot end presentation time has elapsed. If the jackpot end presentation time has elapsed, the special chart process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H] along with the jackpot end settings, including the game state setting at the end of the jackpot.

The normal special pattern processing of the special pattern process includes a special pattern big win judgment process and a special pattern small win judgment process. The normal special pattern processing may also include a special pattern time-saving judgment process. In these judgment processes, a special pattern judgment value check is performed using the value of the random number MR1 for special pattern judgment read from the special pattern judgment buffer to see which judgment range the value is included in. For example, if the value of the random number MR1 for special pattern judgment is included in the big win judgment range, the special pattern big win judgment process judges that the display result of the special pattern is a "big win". Also, if the value of the random number MR1 for special pattern judgment is included in the small win judgment range, the special pattern small win judgment process judges that the display result of the special pattern is a "small win". If the value of the random number MR1 for special pattern judgment is included in the time-saving judgment range, the special pattern time-saving judgment process may judge that the display result of the special pattern is a "time-saving".

Figure 14 shows an example of the determination of the special symbol display result, which is the display result of the special symbol. The start hole winning designation value is set to "1" in the case of a first start winning caused by the game ball entering the first start winning hole, and is set to "2" in the case of a second start winning caused by the game ball entering the second start winning hole. That is, when the start hole winning designation value is "1", a first special symbol game is executed, which is a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, when the start hole winning designation value is "2", a second special symbol game is executed, which is a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol big win judgment process, the special symbol small win judgment process, and the special symbol time-saving judgment process, the MR1 judgment value is set to be compared with the value of the random number MR1 so that the special symbol display result is determined to be either a "big win", a "small win", a "time-saving", or a "miss" depending on whether the start-port winning designation value is "1" or "2". The MR1 judgment value assigned to the special symbol display result of "big win" is also called the big win judgment value. The MR1 judgment value assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win" is also called the small win judgment value. The MR1 judgment value assigned to the special symbol display result of "time-saving" is also called the time-saving judgment value. The big win probability based on the setting of the big win judgment value indicates the proportion of big wins due to the special symbol game. The small win probability based on the setting of the small win judgment value indicates the proportion of small wins due to the special symbol game. The time-saving probability based on the setting of the time-saving judgment value indicates the proportion of base control that can be changed by the special symbol game.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, a description will be given of the main operations of the performance control board 12. In the performance control board 12, when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 17 or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process.

15 is a flowchart showing the main performance control process executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the performance control board 12. When the main performance control process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first executes an initialization process (step S71). The initialization process includes clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and register settings for the timer circuit mounted on the performance control board 12. At this time, an initial operation control process (step S72) is executed. The initial operation control process includes control for performing initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check. Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time, such as 2 milliseconds, elapses based on the register settings for the timer circuit. If the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated and standby is performed.

If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and a command analysis process (step S75) is executed. The command analysis process includes, for example, reading out various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer, and then performing processing such as setting and control corresponding to the read presentation control command. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on, so that which presentation control command was received or the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. When the presentation control command specifies a game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to that game state.

After executing the command analysis process, the performance control process (step S76) is executed. The performance control process includes control of various performance devices, such as displaying the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and driving the movable body 32. The control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11. Following the performance control process, the performance random number update process (step S77) is executed. The performance random number update process updates at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 16 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 shown in Figure 15 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead performance setting process (step S151). The look-ahead performance setting process includes, for example, processing such as judging, deciding, and setting regarding the execution of a look-ahead preview performance based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. It also includes processing for displaying a hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the look-ahead performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the performance process code stored in a specified address in the RAM 122 (step S152). The performance process code can be updated to any value between 00 [H] and 0A [H], and is also called the performance control process code. The performance control CPU 120 selects and executes the process that corresponds to the read value of the performance process code (step S153). This makes it possible to control the execution of the performance, including the variable display of the performance patterns.

Figure 16 (B) shows an example of processing that can be executed in response to the presentation process code in the presentation control process processing. The presentation control process processing includes, as processing that can be executed in response to the presentation process code, a waiting process for a change pattern command corresponding to a presentation process code of 00 [H], a presentation pattern change start process corresponding to a presentation process code of 01 [H], a presentation pattern change in progress process corresponding to a presentation process code of 02 [H], a presentation pattern change stop process corresponding to a presentation process code of 03 [H], a small win display process corresponding to a presentation process code of 04 [H], a small win open process corresponding to a presentation process code of 05 [H], a small win end presentation process corresponding to a presentation process code of 06 [H], a big win display process corresponding to a presentation process code of 07 [H], a round process corresponding to a presentation process code of 08 [H], a round post process corresponding to a presentation process code of 09 [H], and a big win end presentation process corresponding to a presentation process code of 0A [H].

The waiting process for receiving a variation pattern command includes a process capable of determining whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 has been received. For example, the presence or absence of reception can be determined by whether or not a variation pattern designation command reception flag set in the command analysis process is on. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has been received, the performance process code is updated to 01 [H]. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has not been received, control of the demo display is performed. The performance pattern change start process includes a process for controlling so that a variation time performance corresponding to a special game is started. For example, in response to the received variation pattern command, a performance pattern for a variation time performance is selected, and the timing value of a performance process timer that measures the performance execution time is started to be updated, and the performance process code is updated to 02 [H]. The performance pattern change process includes a process for controlling the switching timing of each performance element that constitutes the performance pattern, and a process for determining whether or not the performance execution time has elapsed based on the timing value of the performance process timer. When it is determined that the performance execution time has elapsed, the performance process code is updated to 03 [H]. The performance pattern change stop process includes a process for controlling the end of the performance during change based on the establishment of the end condition of the performance during change, such as the elapse of the performance execution time or the reception of a performance pattern determination command, and for controlling the display of the performance result corresponding to the determined special pattern. Then, the performance process code is updated and various settings are made according to the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the performance process code is updated to 07 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the performance process code is updated to 04 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time reduction" or "miss", the performance process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H].

The small win display process includes a setting process for performing a small win fanfare performance when a small win occurs. The small win fanfare performance includes a small win display in which a performance image that notifies the occurrence of a small win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the small win fanfare performance time has elapsed. When the small win fanfare performance time has elapsed, the performance process code is updated to 05 [H] along with the end control of the small win fanfare performance. The small win open processing performs settings for performing a small win open performance in response to the opening of the large winning hole in the small win game state, and updates the performance process code to 06 [H]. The small win end performance processing includes a process for controlling the display of a performance image that notifies the end of the small win game state on the screen of the image display device 5 so that it can be displayed. In addition, in the small win game state, when the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 24 and it is determined that a V win has occurred, the execution control of the V win performance that notifies the occurrence of a V win is performed. If a V win occurs during a small win game state, the presentation process code is updated to 07 [H]. If a V win does not occur during a small win game state, the presentation process code is cleared and updated to the initial value, 00 [H].

The jackpot display process includes a setting process for performing a fanfare effect when a jackpot occurs. The fanfare effect includes a jackpot display in which an effect image that notifies the occurrence of a jackpot is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the fanfare effect time has elapsed. When the fanfare effect time has elapsed, the effect process code is updated to 08 [H] along with the end control of the fanfare effect. The round processing includes display settings during the round in the jackpot game state. When the round end condition is met, if it is not the end of the final round, the effect process code is updated to 09 [H], and if it is the end of the final round, the effect process code is updated to 0A [H]. The round post-processing includes display settings between rounds in the jackpot game state. Then, when the round start condition is met, the effect process code is updated to 08 [H]. The jackpot end effect includes a process for controlling the display of an effect image that notifies the end of the jackpot game state on the screen of the image display device 5 so that it can be displayed. After that, when the time to announce the end of the jackpot has elapsed, the presentation process code is cleared and updated to its initial value, 00 [H].

(Modification of the basic explanation)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, functions, processing, and operation in the basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and may have a part of the configuration described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. In the above embodiment, when a subordinate concept is described, an invention of a superordinate concept using a homologous or similar matter, or an invention of a superordinate concept using a common property, is included as the present invention, and may have a part of the structure or characteristics described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning prize, or it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points based on the occurrence of a winning prize.

The display during the variable display of the special pattern may be only one type of pattern, such as a symbol indicating "-", and the variable display may be such that this pattern is repeatedly displayed and turned off. One type of pattern may be displayed during the variable display, and this pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped. For example, the display result may be a non-display state in which the symbol indicating "-" is not displayed, and no special pattern is displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to change the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in response to a plurality of set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate may be changed by using a different jackpot determination value for each set value. As a specific example, the set value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning a jackpot. In this case, if 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the set value, the ball payout rate may also change depending on the set value. The probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. During execution of the variable display, a setting suggestion performance that suggests the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate may be executed. The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. The setting suggestion performance may suggest the probability of a jackpot through any performance, and may also be able to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

The invention relating to gaming machines is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but can also be applied to slot machines as appropriate. A slot machine can execute a game in which medals are inserted, a predetermined bet amount is set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of an operating lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of a stop button, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player if a specific combination of symbols is formed. In a slot machine, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player may include one or more of the so-called bonuses, such as a big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

The programs and data for implementing various controls, including the progress of the game and the execution of the performance, may be distributed and provided to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, or may be distributed and provided by being installed in advance in a storage device of the computer device. In addition, the machine may be provided with a communication processing unit that can be connected to an external device on a network via a communication line, etc., and may distribute and provide the programs and data by downloading them from the external device. The execution form of the game and performance may also be executable by mounting a removable recording medium, or may be executable by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via a communication line, etc. in an internal memory, or may be executable directly using the hardware resources of an external device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., or may be executable by exchanging data with another computer device, etc., via a network.

When comparing various percentages, such as the decision percentage of a process or data, or the execution percentage of a performance, expressions such as "high", "low", and "different" may include the case where one is a percentage of "0%" or "100%". For example, for one decision result or execution content, it may include the case where there is no decision or execution at a percentage of "0%", or the case where there is always a decision or execution at a percentage of "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 23AK)
The pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic section 23AK is controlled so that the display result of the special symbol is either a "miss" or a "jackpot", but is not a "small win" or a "time-saving". In addition, the game state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the high probability state based on the establishment of a predetermined high probability control condition. The high probability state is controlled to continue until a predetermined high probability end condition is established, such as the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays or the start of the next high probability state.

When in a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 50's special winning opening, which is the large winning opening, is opened, and the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, and based on this, the special variable control condition for entering the special variable state after the jackpot game state ends is established. In other words, the location where the specific area switch 24 is installed is set as a specific area, and the special variable control condition can be established based on the game ball passing through this specific area.

Based on the establishment of such probability variable control conditions, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the state is controlled to a high probability high base state. The high probability high base state has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state by probability variable control compared to the normal state, and the high base control makes it easier to execute variable display compared to the normal state. Based on the non-establishment of the probability variable control conditions, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the state is controlled to a low probability high base state. The low probability high base state has the same probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the normal state, and the high base control makes it easier to execute variable display compared to the normal state.

Figure 17-1 is a flow chart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. In normal special symbol processing, CPU 103 determines whether the total reserved memory count is "0" or not (step AKS101). The total reserved memory count is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count, and indicates the number of reserved information stored for variable display that has not yet started. In step AKS101, for example, if the count value of the total reserved memory counter is "0", it is determined that the total reserved memory count is "0". The total reserved memory counter is provided at a specified address in RAM 102, and it is sufficient that it is capable of counting the total reserved memory count.

When the total reserved memory number is other than "0" in response to step AKS101 (step AKS101; No), the total reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS102). At this time, data indicating the start port winning designated value may be set. For example, when the second reserved memory number is other than "0", the start port winning designated value is set to "2" and the second reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1. In contrast, when the second reserved memory number is "0", the start port winning designated value is set to "1" and the first reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1. If the total reserved memory number is other than "0" in step AKS101, at least one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is other than "0". When setting the data indicating the start port winning designated value, it is sufficient to first determine whether the second reserved memory number is other than "0" so that the special game using the second special symbol can be executed with priority over the special game using the first special symbol.

Following step AKS102, a special symbol determination control table is specified (step AKS103). The special symbol determination control table stores various information used to control the determination of special symbols. For example, the special symbol determination control table specifies the addresses of a special symbol determination buffer, a winning symbol buffer, a special symbol buffer, and the like. The special symbol determination buffer stores data indicating the random number MR1 for special symbol determination among the game random numbers extracted based on the occurrence of a start winning by the start winning determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 13 (A). The winning symbol buffer stores data indicating the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol among the game random numbers extracted based on the occurrence of a start winning. The special symbol buffer stores data indicating a confirmed special symbol. The confirmed special symbol is the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game.

The special symbol determination control table may include a first special symbol determination control table corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol determination control table corresponding to the second special symbol. In step AKS103, after the second special symbol determination control table is specified, it may be determined whether the start port winning designation value is "1". If the start port winning designation value is "1", the first special symbol determination control table may be re-specified. The second special symbol determination control table may be specified by storing a value corresponding to the top address of the second special symbol determination control table in the HL register that serves as a pointer. When the first special symbol determination control table is re-specified, the value of the pointer is overwritten by storing a value corresponding to the top address of the first special symbol determination control table in the HL register that serves as a pointer. In this way, by specifying the second special symbol determination control table and then resetting the first special symbol determination control table when the start port winning determination value is "1", if the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, the program capacity of the storage command used for table setting can be reduced, improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, if the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, the processing by the branch command can be simplified, making it easier to check at the design stage, and improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

After step AKS103, the memory contents of the special symbol corresponding buffer are shifted (step AKS104). The special symbol corresponding buffer may include a buffer for determining a special symbol and a buffer for a winning symbol, as well as a buffer for selecting a variation pattern type and a buffer for a variation pattern, and may be a buffer for storing random numbers in which data indicating a game random number extracted based on the occurrence of a start winning is stored. In step AKS104, for example, after setting the transfer destination address, transfer source address, and number of transfers, a block transfer command is executed to transfer and shift the memory contents in each storage area of the special symbol corresponding buffer by one unit at a time to the previous storage area.

Following step AKS104, the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol is read (step AKS105). Then, a special symbol jackpot determination (step AKS106) and special symbol information setting (step AKS107) are performed. In this embodiment, the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined to be either a "jackpot" or a "miss," and is not determined to be a "small hit" or a "time reduction."

The special symbol jackpot determination in step AKS106 compares the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out in step AKS105 with the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the special symbol display result is a "jackpot". The determination of whether or not the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" is a determination of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state. Then, when the special symbol jackpot determination determines that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", the jackpot designated value 01 [H] is set in the hit flag. Note that the hit flag is set to the initial value 00 [H] when the special symbol normal processing is executed.

The special symbol information setting in step AKS107 includes setting the type of jackpot and the jackpot symbol when the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", and setting the miss symbol when the special symbol display result is a "miss". Data indicating the type of jackpot is stored in the jackpot type buffer. Data indicating the confirmed special symbol, such as a jackpot symbol or a miss symbol, is stored in the special symbol buffer. The special symbol buffer includes a first special symbol buffer corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol buffer corresponding to the second special symbol. In step AKS107, the address of the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer can be identified by referring to the special symbol determination control table specified in step AKS103.

After step AKS107, post-determination data setting (step AKS108) and variable pattern setting processing (step AKS109) are executed, and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. The post-determination data setting in step AKS108 includes designating a post-determination work setting table and executing data set processing. When designating the post-determination work setting table, the address of the post-determination work setting table corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be specified by referring to the special symbol determination control table designated in step AKS103. The data set processing in step AKS109 may include a data clearing process for clearing the special symbol determination buffer and the winning symbol buffer and initializing the stored values.

When the total number of reserved memories is "0" corresponding to step AKS101 (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on or not (step AKS110). The demo display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration display is being executed. When the demo display flag is on (step AKS110; Yes), the normal special symbol processing ends. In contrast, when the demo display flag is off (step AKS110; No), the demo display flag is set to the on state (step AKS111), and the transmission setting of the standby command is performed (step AKS112), and the normal special symbol processing ends. The transmission setting of step AKS112 includes the specification of the standby command transmission table and the command set processing. The standby command transmission table may include table data for transmitting the background specification command and the customer waiting demo command.

Figure 17-2 shows a jackpot type determination example AKD01. In the normal special pattern processing shown in Figure 17-1, in the special pattern information setting of step AKS107, when the special pattern display result is "jackpot", the jackpot type is set using the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type. For example, when the hit flag is set to 01 [H] to indicate a jackpot designated value, data indicating the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type is read out, and a jackpot type determination table is selected corresponding to the start port winning designated value, the probability variable flag, and the time-saving flag. The jackpot type determination table may be prepared in advance in correspondence with the cases where the start port winning designated value is "1" and "2", where the probability variable flag is on and off, where the time-saving flag is on and off, etc. The probability variable flag is set to the on state corresponding to the high probability state as the probability variable state, and the time-saving flag is set to the on state corresponding to the high base state as the time-saving state. The jackpot type determination table is composed of table data including judgment value data. The judgment value data of the jackpot type determination table indicates the allocation judgment value for each jackpot type that can be determined, and multiple allocation judgment values corresponding to multiple jackpot types can be set. In the special pattern information setting of step AKS107, when the special pattern display result is "jackpot", the jackpot type may be determined using a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a special pattern that will be the jackpot pattern may be selected using a random number MR2 for selecting a winning pattern. For example, a loop process that can sequentially compare the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type with multiple allocation judgment values indicated in the judgment value data may be executed, and when the value of the random number is equal to or less than the allocation judgment value, the jackpot type corresponding to the allocation judgment value may be determined. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined and the jackpot pattern may be selected using the random number MR2 for selecting a winning pattern.

In the jackpot game state, there are multiple jackpot types that have the same or different settings for the upper limit time during which the distribution member that is the V winning opening opening member opens the V winning area 51 during the execution of a specific round. As an example, the multiple jackpot types can be classified into a case where the jackpot type is "normal" and a case where the jackpot type is "probability change". Among these, when the jackpot type is "normal", the upper limit time for opening the V winning area 51 is set to 50 milliseconds (ms). In contrast, when the jackpot type is "probability change", the upper limit time for opening the V winning area 51 is set to 29,500 milliseconds. Therefore, when the jackpot type is "normal", the possibility of the game ball passing (entering) the V winning area 51 is low, and the probability change control condition for entering the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state is unlikely to be established. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "probability variable," there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through (enter) the V winning area 51, and the probability variable control conditions for entering the probability variable state after the jackpot game state ends are likely to be met.

In this embodiment, the jackpot types NA01 to NA11 are included as the jackpot type when it is "normal", and the jackpot types KA01 to KA15 are included as the jackpot type when it is "probable chance". In the determination example AKD01, when the start port winning designation value is "1" or "2", it is possible to determine one of multiple jackpot types at a predetermined ratio in response to the presence or absence of probable chance control in the probable chance state, the presence or absence of high base control in the time-saving state, etc. Here, when the high base control is "not performed", the jackpot type is determined at a different ratio when the probable chance control is "not performed" or "present". In contrast, when the high base control is "present", the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio when the probable chance control is "not performed" or "present". In addition, when the start port winning designation value is "1" or "2", it is possible to determine some or all of the jackpot types that are different.

In the example AKD01, when both the probability variable control and the high base control are "none", if the starting hole winning designation value is "1", the jackpot type can be determined to be either NA01-NA04 or KA01-KA06, while if the starting hole winning designation value is "2", the jackpot type can be determined to be either NA05-NA07 or KA07-KA10. Therefore, when both the probability variable control and the high base control are "none", all different jackpot types can be determined depending on whether the starting hole winning designation value is "1" or "2". Also, when the probability variable control is "on" and the high base control is "off", if the starting port winning designation value is "1", the jackpot type can be determined to be one of NA02, NA04, or KA02, KA04 to KA06, while when the starting port winning designation value is "2", the jackpot type can be determined to be one of NA05 to NA07, or KA07 to KA10. Therefore, when the probability variable control is "on" and the high base control is "off", if the starting port winning designation value is "1" or "2", all different jackpot types can be determined. Alternatively, when high base control is "enabled," if the starting port winning designation value is "1," the jackpot type can be determined to be either NA08, KA11, or KA15, while if the starting port winning designation value is "2," the jackpot type can be determined to be either NA09-NA11 or KA12-KA15. In this way, when high base control is "enabled," the common jackpot type KA15 can be determined when the starting port winning designation value is "1" and when it is "2." Therefore, when high base control is "enabled," a partially different jackpot type can be determined when the starting port winning designation value is "1" and when it is "2."

In the determination example AKD01, when the start port winning designation value is "1", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variable control or the presence or absence of the high base control, the jackpot type is determined to be included in "normal" at a determination rate of 100/200, i.e., 50% of the time, and the jackpot type is determined to be included in "probability variable" at a determination rate of 100/200, i.e., 50% of the time. Also, when the start port winning designation value is "2", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variable control or the presence or absence of the high base control, the jackpot type is determined to be included in "normal" at a determination rate of 12/200, i.e., 6% of the time, and the jackpot type is determined to be included in "probability variable" at a determination rate of 188/200, i.e., 94% of the time. In this way, when the start port winning designation value is "2", the jackpot type is determined to be included in "probability variable" at a higher rate than when the start port winning designation value is "1". Therefore, when the special symbol display result is "jackpot" in a special symbol game using the second special symbol and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends can be controlled to a high probability state at a higher rate than when the special symbol display result is "jackpot" in a special symbol game using the first special symbol and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state.

When the starting port winning designation value is "1", the jackpot type determination table has multiple sections in the order of a first section with a determination ratio of 11/200, a second section with a determination ratio of 44/200, a third section with a determination ratio of 11/200, and a fourth section with a determination ratio of 34/200, corresponding to the determinable jackpot types included in "normal", regardless of the presence or absence of special rate control or high base control, and multiple sections in the order of a fifth section with a determination ratio of 12/200, a sixth section with a determination ratio of 7/200, a seventh section with a determination ratio of 12/200, an eighth section with a determination ratio of 19/200, a ninth section with a determination ratio of 15/200, and a tenth section with a determination ratio of 35/200, corresponding to the determinable jackpot types included in "special rate". The determination value data is set to indicate multiple allocation determination values. In addition, when the starting gate winning designation value is "2", the jackpot type determination table has multiple sections in the order of the first section with a determination ratio of 2/200, the second section with 2/200, the third section with 2/200, the fourth section with 2/200, the fifth section with 1/200, the sixth section with 1/200, and the seventh section with 2/200, in accordance with the determinable jackpot types included in "normal", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variation control or the presence or absence of the high base control, and the determination value data indicating multiple allocation determination values is set so as to have multiple sections in the order of the eighth section with a determination ratio of 62/200, the ninth section with 50/200, the tenth section with 62/200, and the eleventh section with 14/200, in accordance with the determinable jackpot types included in "probability variation".

The jackpot type determination table has multiple divisions with common determination ratios corresponding to the start port winning designation values of "1" and "2", regardless of the presence or absence of special probability control or high base control, while judgment value data indicating multiple allocation judgment values is set so that the allocation of each division to the jackpot type that is the determination result differs depending on the presence or absence of special probability control or high base control. Since such determination ratios have multiple divisions in common, it is possible to easily design a table used to determine the jackpot type, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Also, since the allocation of each division to the jackpot type that is the determination result differs, it is possible to flexibly design the determination ratio of the jackpot type, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

In the determination example AKD01, when the starting hole winning designation value is "1", the probability variable control and the high base control are both "none", so that the first division with a determination ratio of 11/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA01, the second division with a determination ratio of 44/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA02, the third division with a determination ratio of 11/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA03, and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 34/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA04, and the determination ratio is set so that the judgment value data is The judgment value data is set so that the fifth division with a determination ratio of 12/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA01, the sixth division with a determination ratio of 7/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA02, the seventh division with a determination ratio of 12/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA03, the eighth division with a determination ratio of 19/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA04, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 15/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA05, and the tenth division with a determination ratio of 35/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA06. In addition, when the starting port winning designation value is "1", the probability variable control is "enabled" and the high base control is "disabled", so that the judgment value data is set so that the first division with a determination ratio of 11/200 and the second division with a determination ratio of 44/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA02, the third division with a determination ratio of 11/200 and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 34/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA04, the fifth division with a determination ratio of 12/200 and the sixth division with a determination ratio of 7/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA02, the seventh division with a determination ratio of 12/200 and the eighth division with a determination ratio of 19/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA04, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 15/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA05, and the tenth division with a determination ratio of 35/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA06. When the starting hole winning designation value is "1", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variation control, the high base control is "on", so the judgment value data is set so that the first division with a determination ratio of 11/200, the second division with a determination ratio of 44/200, the third division with a determination ratio of 11/200, and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 34/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA08, the fifth division with a determination ratio of 12/200, the sixth division with a determination ratio of 7/200, the seventh division with a determination ratio of 12/200, and the eighth division with a determination ratio of 19/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA11, and the ninth division with a determination ratio of 15/200 and the tenth division with a determination ratio of 35/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA15.

In the determination example AKD01, when the starting hole winning designation value is "2", the first division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and the second division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are both assigned to the jackpot type NA05, the third division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA06, the fifth division with a determination ratio of 1/200, the sixth division with a determination ratio of 1/200 and the sixth division with a determination ratio of 1/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA07, The judgment value data is set so that the seventh division with a determination ratio of 2/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA07, the eighth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA07, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 50/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA08, the tenth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA09, and the eleventh division with a determination ratio of 14/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA10. In addition, when the starting port winning designation value is "2", the judgment value data is set so that each division of the determination ratio due to the probability variable control being "yes" and the high base control being "no" is assigned to a common jackpot type with each division of the determination ratio due to the probability variable control and the high base control both being "no". When the starting hole winning designation value is "2", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability control, the high base control is "on", so the first division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and the second division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the big win type NA09, the third division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the big win type NA10, the fifth division with a determination ratio of 1/200, the sixth division with a determination ratio of 1/200, and the third division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the big win type NA11. The judgment value data is set so that the seventh division is assigned to the jackpot type NA11, the eighth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA12, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 50/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA13, the tenth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA14, and the eleventh division with a determination ratio of 14/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA15.

Figure 17-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS109 of Figure 17-1 as the variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 judges whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot" or not (step AKS221). For example, the hit flag is read, and if the read value is 01 [H], which is the jackpot designated value, it is judged that the special chart display result is a "jackpot". If the special chart display result is a "miss" and not a "jackpot" (step AKS221; No), the start port winning designated value is read (step AKS222). Accordingly, the presentation state selection designated value is read (step AKS223). The presentation state selection designated value is a stored value in the presentation state selection buffer, and can be set to any value from 00 [H] to 0D [H], for example. When the jackpot game state ends, a value corresponding to the jackpot type can be set as the presentation state selection designated value. In addition, when the variable display ends, the presentation state selection designated value can be updated in response to the establishment of a preset update condition. When the game state is in the normal state, the presentation state selection designated value is set to 00 [H].

After step AKS223, a loss time fluctuation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS224). The loss time fluctuation pattern type selection table is a table used to select a fluctuation pattern type when the special chart display result is a "loss", and it is sufficient if it is possible to specify a different table based on the starting gate winning designation value read out by step AKS222 and the performance state selection designation value read out by step AKS223. Furthermore, when the special chart display result is a "loss", it is sufficient if multiple fluctuation pattern type selection tables that can be selected corresponding to the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are prepared in advance.

When the special chart display result is "jackpot" in response to step AKS221 (step AKS221; Yes), a jackpot type designation value is read out (step AKS225). Accordingly, a presentation state selection designation value is read out (step AKS226). Then, a jackpot time fluctuation pattern type selection table is designated (step AKS227). The jackpot time fluctuation pattern type selection table is a table used to select a fluctuation pattern type when the special chart display result is "jackpot", and it is sufficient if it is possible to designate a table corresponding to the jackpot type read out in step AKS225 and the presentation state selection designation value read out in step AKS226.

After steps AKS224 and AKS227, the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern is read (step AKS228). The data indicating the value of the random number value MR4 for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern may be stored in the buffer for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special pattern corresponding buffer. Next, the type of fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern (step AKS229). Next, the fluctuation pattern determination table is specified (step AKS230). In step AKS230, it is sufficient that a different fluctuation pattern determination table can be specified in response to the type of fluctuation pattern selected in step AKS229. Then, the value of the random number MR5 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern is read (step AKS231). The data indicating the value of the random number MR5 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be stored in the buffer for determining the type of fluctuation pattern included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special pattern corresponding buffer. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the random number MR5 used to determine the fluctuation pattern (step AKS232).

Following step AKS232, a command transmission setting at the start of fluctuation is performed (step AKS233). The command transmission setting at the start of fluctuation may include the specification of a fluctuation command transmission table and the execution of a command set process. The fluctuation command transmission table includes table data for transmitting a performance control command at the start of fluctuation in response to the start of fluctuation of the special pattern in the special pattern game. For example, the fluctuation command transmission table specified in response to the first special pattern game includes table data for transmitting a performance pattern designation command, a first fluctuation start designation command, and a fluctuation pattern designation command in addition to the table top data indicating the number of processes. In contrast, the fluctuation command transmission table specified in response to the second special pattern game includes table data for transmitting a performance pattern designation command, a second fluctuation start designation command, and a fluctuation pattern designation command in addition to the table top data specifying the number of processes.

After step AKS233, the special symbol fluctuation time is set (step AKS236). The special symbol fluctuation time indicates the variable display time as the special symbol fluctuation time. In order to set the special symbol fluctuation time, a special symbol fluctuation time table is specified. The special symbol fluctuation time table contains table data for setting time data indicating the variable display time such as the special symbol fluctuation time in accordance with the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern. In step AKS236, the specified special symbol fluctuation time table is referenced and a time data expansion process is executed, whereby the time data corresponding to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern is stored in the HL register. The time data obtained in this way can be set as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer as the variable time data.

After step AKS236, data after the change pattern is set (step AKS237), and then the change pattern setting process is terminated. In order to set data after the change pattern, a data table after the change pattern is specified. The data table after the change pattern is set includes table data for updating the special pattern process code to 01 [H], which is a value corresponding to the special pattern change process. The data table after the change pattern is set also includes table data for updating the stored value of the special pattern change display buffer to 01 [H]. The special pattern change display buffer stores values that specify the display pattern during the change of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and includes a first special pattern change display buffer corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second special pattern change display buffer corresponding to the second special pattern. In step AKS237, by executing data set processing with reference to the specified data table after setting the variation pattern, the stored value of the first special symbol variation display buffer is updated to 01 [H] when the first special symbol game is started, and the stored value of the second special symbol variation display buffer is updated to 01 [H] when the second special symbol game is started. In addition, the random number value buffer in which the random numbers used for determining the variation pattern are stored may be cleared to initialize the stored value.

Figure 17-4 shows an example of a miss variation pattern. A miss variation pattern is a variation pattern that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "miss". The multiple variation patterns each differ in the special chart variation time and the variable display mode of the performance pattern. The miss variation pattern includes a reach variation pattern that becomes a reach mode in the variable display of the performance pattern, and a non-reach variation pattern that does not become a reach mode. In the example of the configuration shown in Figure 17-4, the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-6 and the variation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-9 are included in the non-reach variation pattern, and the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-7 and the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3 are included in the reach variation pattern. The reach variation pattern includes a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach performance of a super reach is executed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 17-4, the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 are included in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 to PA2-7 and the fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are included in the super reach fluctuation pattern. The normal reach fluctuation pattern includes fluctuation patterns with different presentation modes such as reach presentation, such as normal reach NOA, normal reach NOB, and normal reach NOC. The super reach fluctuation pattern includes fluctuation patterns with different presentation modes such as reach presentation, such as super reach SPA, super reach SPB, super reach SPC, super reach SPD, super reach SPE, and super reach SPF. In addition to the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the reach fluctuation pattern includes a high-speed reach fluctuation pattern in which the display result stops after the reach mode is reached in a short time. For example, the fluctuation pattern PB2-1 shown in Figure 17-4 has a short special chart fluctuation time of 3,500 milliseconds, and is a high-speed reach fluctuation pattern that is the presentation mode for a high-speed reach SRA.

Figure 17-5 shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the special chart display result is "jackpot". The variable display of the performance pattern according to the jackpot fluctuation pattern is a fixed display of the confirmed performance pattern of the jackpot combination after the reach state is reached. The jackpot fluctuation pattern includes a fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed, similar to the reach fluctuation pattern in the miss fluctuation pattern. In the configuration example shown in Figure 17-5, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 are included in the fluctuation patterns in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and the fluctuation patterns PA3-4 to PA3-10 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-3 to PB3-11 are included in the fluctuation patterns in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In addition to the normal reach and super reach reach effects, the jackpot fluctuation patterns also include fluctuation patterns in which the confirmed performance pattern of the jackpot combination stops and displays in a short time. For example, the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 shown in FIG. 17-5 has an extremely short special chart fluctuation time of 2500 milliseconds, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the display result stops and displays a high-speed SQA without executing a reach performance. In addition, the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 has a short special chart fluctuation time of 4500 milliseconds, and is a high-speed reach performance pattern in which the display result stops and displays a high-speed reach SRA after a short time in the reach mode.

Figure 17-6 (A) shows a setting example AKA01 of the loss reference table. The loss reference table is a table that is referenced when specifying the loss variation pattern type selection table in step AKS224 of the variation pattern setting process shown in Figure 17-3. As the loss reference table, multiple tables corresponding to the performance state selection designated value may be prepared in advance. In the setting example AKA01, one of the reference tables TS01 to TS09 is referenced as the loss reference table in response to the performance state selection designated value being 00 [H] and 06 [H] to 0E [H]. Each of the reference tables TS01 to TS09 is composed of table data that allows one of multiple tables prepared in advance to be specified as the loss variation pattern type selection table in response to the start port winning designated value, the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved memory number.

Figure 17-6 (B) shows an example of the configuration of reference table TS01. Reference table TS01 is referenced when the presentation state selection designated value is 00 [H]. When the start gate winning designated value is "1", reference table TS01 allows table TA10 to be designated as the loss-time variation pattern type selection table when the first reserved memory number is "0", table TA11 when the first reserved memory number is "1", table TA12 when the first reserved memory number is "2", and table TA13 when the first reserved memory number is "3". In addition, when the start port winning designation value is "2", the reference table TS01 allows the table TA20 to be designated as the table for selecting the variation pattern type when the first reserved memory number is "0" and the second reserved memory number is "0" to "3", and the table TA21 to be designated as the table for selecting the variation pattern type when the first reserved memory number is "1" to "4" and the second reserved memory number is "0" to "3". In addition, in step AKS102 of the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 17-1, when the second reserved memory number is other than "0", the start port winning designation value is set to "2" and the second reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1. In contrast, when the second reserved memory number is "0", the start port winning designation value is set to "1" and the first reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1. And the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is "4". Therefore, when the start port winning designation value is "1" in step AKS224 of the variable pattern setting process, the first reserved memory number is any one of "0" to "3", and the second reserved memory number is "0". Also, when the start port winning designation value is "2" in step AKS224 of the variable pattern setting process, the first reserved memory number is any one of "0" to "4", and the second reserved memory number is any one of "0" to "3".

Figure 17-6 (C) shows an example of the configuration of the reference table TS02. The reference table TS02 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 06 [H] or 0E [H]. When the start port winning designation value is "1", the reference table TS02 allows table TB10 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "3". In addition, when the start port winning designation value is "2", the reference table TS02 allows table TB20 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0", and table TB21 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "1" to "3".

Figure 17-6 (D) shows an example of the configuration of reference table TS03. Reference table TS03 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 07 [H]. When the start port winning designation value is "1", reference table TS03 allows table TB10 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "3". When the start port winning designation value is "2", reference table TS03 allows table TB22 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0", and table TB23 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "1" to "3".

Figure 17-6 (E) shows an example of the configuration of reference table TS04. Reference table TS04 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 08 [H]. When the start port winning designation value is "1", reference table TS04 allows table TB10 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "3". Also, when the start port winning designation value is "2", reference table TS04 allows table TB24 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0", and table TB25 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "1" to "3".

Figure 17-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of reference table TS05. Reference table TS05 is referenced when the performance state selection designated value is 09 [H]. Reference table TS05 allows a common table TB11 to be designated as the loss-time variation pattern type selection table when the start gate winning designated value is "1" or "2", regardless of the first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number.

Figure 17-7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the reference table TS06. The reference table TS06 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 0A [H]. When the start port winning designation value is "1", the reference table TS06 allows table TB12 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "3". In addition, when the start port winning designation value is "2", the reference table TS06 allows table TB26 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0", and table TB27 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "1" to "3".

Figure 17-7 (C) shows an example of the configuration of the reference table TS07. The reference table TS07 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 0B [H]. The reference table TS07 allows a common table TB13 to be specified as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table when the start port winning designation value is "1" and when it is "2", regardless of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Figure 17-7 (D) shows an example of the configuration of the reference table TS08. The reference table TS08 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 0C [H]. The reference table TS08 allows a common table TB14 to be specified as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table when the start port winning designation value is "1" and when it is "2", regardless of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Figure 17-7 (E) shows an example of the configuration of the reference table TS09. Reference table TS09 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 0D [H]. Reference table TS09 allows the common table TB15 to be designated as the loss time variation pattern type selection table regardless of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number when the start gate winning designation value is "1" or "2".

Figure 17-8 shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot reference table TS21. The jackpot reference table TS21 is a table that is referenced when specifying a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in step AKS227 of the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 17-3. The jackpot reference table TS21 is composed of table data that allows one of multiple pre-prepared tables to be specified as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the presentation state selection value and the jackpot type.

When the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows the selection table TA30 to be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA01, NA02, NA05, KA01, KA02, and KA07, the selection table TA31 to be specified as a jackpot type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA03, NA04, NA06, KA03, KA04, KA05, and KA08, and the table TA32 to be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA07, KA06, KA09, and KA10. Note that when the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H], the game state is a low probability low base state corresponding to the normal state, and the high probability control in the high probability state and the high base control in the time-saving state as the high base state are not performed. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 17-2, when the probability variable control and high base control are "none", it is possible to determine one of the jackpot types NA01 to NA06 and the jackpot types KA01 to KA10, and it is not possible to determine any other jackpot type. Therefore, the jackpot reference table TS21 shows a table that can be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type that can be determined when the presentation state selection designated value is 00 [H]. Even when the presentation state selection designated value is other than 00 [H], a table that can be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table is shown in response to the jackpot type that can be determined when the presentation state selection designated value is that.

When the presentation state selection designation value is 06 [H] or 0E [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB30 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 or KA11 to KA15. When the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB31 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA08, NA09, KA11, and KA12, table TB32 to be designated as the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, table TB33 to be designated as the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and table TB34 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot type KA15. Alternatively, when the presentation state selection designation value is 08 [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB35 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table corresponding to the jackpot types NA08, NA09, KA11, and KA12, table TB36 to be designated as the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, table TB37 to be designated as the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and table TB38 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table corresponding to the jackpot type KA15.

When the presentation state selection designation value is 09 [H], 0B [H], 0C [H], or 0D [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB40 to be specified as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type NA08-NA11 or jackpot type KA11-KA14, and table TB41 to be specified as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type KA15, respectively. Also, when the presentation state selection designation value is 0A [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB42 to be specified as the jackpot type NA08, NA09, KA11, KA12, table TB43 to be specified as the jackpot type NA10, KA13, table TB44 to be specified as the jackpot type NA11, KA14, and table TB45 to be specified as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type KA15, respectively. The period during which the performance state selection designation value can be set to any of 06 [H] to 0E [H] is included in the period during which high base control is performed in the time-saving state as the high base state. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 17-2, when high base control is "on", it can be determined to be any of the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and KA11 to KA15, and cannot be determined to any other jackpot type. Therefore, the jackpot reference table TS21 shows a table that can be specified as the jackpot time variation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type that can be determined when the performance state selection designation value is any of 06 [H] to 0E [H].

Figures 17-9 and 17-10 show example configurations of tables that can be specified as failure-time fluctuation pattern type selection tables. Tables that can be specified as failure-time fluctuation pattern type selection tables include tables TA10 to TA13, tables TA20, TA21, tables TB10 to TB15, and tables TB20 to TB27. Each table that can be specified as a failure-time fluctuation pattern type selection table is composed of table data that includes judgment value data that indicates the allocation judgment value for each selectable fluctuation pattern type.

Table TA10 shown in FIG. 17-9(A) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 17-6(B) is referenced. Table TA10 is configured with judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA1-1, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3 can be selected. Table TA11 shown in FIG. 17-9(B) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 17-6(B) is referenced. Table TA11 is configured with judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA1-2, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3 can be selected. Table TA12 shown in FIG. 17-9(C) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 17-6(B) is referenced. The table TA12 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA1-3, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3 can be selected. The table TA13 shown in FIG. 17-9 (D) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (B) is referenced. The table TA13 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA1-4, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3 can be selected. The table TA20 shown in FIG. 17-9 (E) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (B) is referenced. The table TA20 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CA1-1 can be selected. Table TA21 shown in FIG. 17-9 (F) can be specified when referring to reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (B). Table TA21 is configured with judgment value data in which allocation judgment values are set so that only fluctuation pattern types CA1-3 can be selected.

Table TB10 shown in FIG. 17-10(A) can be specified when the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 17-6(C) or the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 17-6(D) is referred to. Table TB10 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-1 can be selected. Table TB11 shown in FIG. 17-10(B) can be specified when the reference table TS05 shown in FIG. 17-7(A) is referred to. Table TB11 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-5 can be selected. Table TB12 shown in FIG. 17-10(C) can be specified when the reference table TS06 shown in FIG. 17-7(B) is referred to. Table TB12 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-1 can be selected. Table TB13 shown in FIG. 17-10(D) can be specified when the reference table TS07 shown in FIG. 17-7(C) is referenced. Table TB13 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern types CB1-7 can be selected. Table TB14 shown in FIG. 17-10(E) can be specified when the reference table TS08 shown in FIG. 17-7(D) is referenced. Table TB14 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern types CB1-8 can be selected. Table TB15 shown in FIG. 17-10(F) can be specified when the reference table TS09 shown in FIG. 17-7(E) is referenced. Table TB15 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern types CB1-9 can be selected.

Table TB20 shown in FIG. 17-10 (G) can be specified when the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 17-6 (C) is referenced. Table TB20 is configured with judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-2 can be selected. Table TB21 shown in FIG. 17-10 (H) can be specified when the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 17-6 (C) is referenced. Table TB21 is configured with judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-3 can be selected. Table TB22 shown in FIG. 17-10 (I) can be specified when the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 17-6 (D) is referenced. Table TB22 is configured with judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2, CB1-4, and CB2-1 can be selected. The table TB23 shown in FIG. 17-10(J) can be specified when the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 17-6(D) is referred to. The table TB23 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-3, CB1-4, and CB2-1 can be selected. The table TB24 shown in FIG. 17-10(K) can be specified when the reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 17-6(E) is referred to. The table TB24 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2, CB1-4, and CB2-1 can be selected. The table TB25 shown in FIG. 17-10(L) can be specified when the reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 17-6(E) is referred to. Table TB25 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-3, CB1-4, and CB2-1 can be selected. Table TB26 shown in FIG. 17-10 (M) can be specified when the reference table TS06 shown in FIG. 17-7 (B) is referenced. Table TB26 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2, CB1-6, and CB2-2 can be selected. Table TB27 shown in FIG. 17-10 (N) can be specified when the reference table TS06 shown in FIG. 17-7 (B) is referenced. Table TB27 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-3, CB1-6, and CB2-2 can be selected.

Figures 17-11 and 17-12 show examples of table configurations that can be specified as jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection tables. Tables that can be specified as jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection tables include tables TA30 to TA32, tables TB30 to TB38, and tables TB40 to TB45. Each table that can be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table is composed of table data that includes judgment value data that indicates the allocation judgment value for each selectable fluctuation pattern type.

Each table from table TA30 shown in FIG. 17-11(A) to table TA32 shown in FIG. 17-11(C) can be specified in accordance with the type of jackpot when the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H] by referring to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8. Table TA30 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-3 can be selected. Table TA31 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-4 can be selected. Table TA32 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA3-2 to CA3-4 can be selected.

Table TB30 shown in FIG. 17-11(D) can be specified in response to any jackpot type when the performance state selection designated value is 06 [H] or 0E [H] with reference to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8. Table TB30 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-1 can be selected. Each table from table TB31 shown in FIG. 17-11(E) to table TB34 shown in FIG. 17-11(H) can be specified in response to a jackpot type when the performance state selection designated value is 07 [H] with reference to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8. Table TB31 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. Table TB32 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. Table TB33 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 can be selected. Table TB34 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-5 can be selected. Each table from table TB35 shown in FIG. 17-11 (I) to table TB38 shown in FIG. 17-11 (L) can be specified corresponding to the jackpot type when the performance state selection designation value is 08 [H] with reference to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8. Table TB35 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. Table TB36 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. Table TB37 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 can be selected. Table TB38 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern types CB3-5 can be selected.

Table TB40 shown in FIG. 17-12(A) and table TB41 shown in FIG. 17-12(B) can be specified in accordance with the jackpot type when the performance state selection designated value is 09[H], 0B[H], 0C[H], or 0D[H] by referring to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8. Table TB40 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB4-1 can be selected. Table TB41 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB4-2 can be selected. Each table from table TB42 shown in FIG. 17-12(C) to table TB45 shown in FIG. 17-12(F) can be specified in accordance with the jackpot type when the performance state selection designated value is 0A[H] by referring to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8. Table TB42 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only fluctuation pattern type CB4-3 can be selected. Table TB43 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only fluctuation pattern type CB4-4 can be selected. Table TB44 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only fluctuation pattern type CB4-5 can be selected. Table TB46 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only fluctuation pattern type CB4-6 can be selected.

Figures 17-13 to 17-16 show the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 17-3, one fluctuation pattern is determined in step AKS232 based on the fluctuation pattern determination table specified in step AKS230 in response to the fluctuation pattern type selected in step AKS229. The fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of table data including judgment value data indicating the allocation judgment value for each determinable fluctuation pattern.

For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-1 shown in Figure 17-13 (A), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1, PA1-5, and PA1-6. For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-2 shown in Figure 17-13 (B), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can only be determined to be fluctuation pattern PA1-2. For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-3 shown in Figure 17-13 (C), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can only be determined to be fluctuation pattern PA1-3. For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-4 shown in Figure 17-13 (D), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can only be determined to be fluctuation pattern PA1-4. For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-5 shown in Figure 17-13 (E), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-5 and PA1-6.

For the fluctuation pattern type CA2-1 shown in FIG. 17-13 (F), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3. For the fluctuation pattern type CA2-2 shown in FIG. 17-13 (G), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5. For the fluctuation pattern type CA2-3 shown in FIG. 17-13 (H), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-6 and PA2-7.

The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 shown in FIG. 17-13 (I) so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CA3-2 shown in FIG. 17-13 (J) so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-4 to PA3-7. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 shown in FIG. 17-13 (K) so that it can be determined to be only the fluctuation pattern PA3-8. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CA3-4 shown in FIG. 17-13 (L) so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-9 and PA3-10.

For the fluctuation pattern type CB1-1 shown in FIG. 17-14(A), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only for the fluctuation pattern PB1-1. For the fluctuation pattern type CB1-2 shown in FIG. 17-14(B), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only for the fluctuation pattern PB1-2. For the fluctuation pattern type CB1-3 shown in FIG. 17-14(C), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only for the fluctuation pattern PB1-3. For the fluctuation pattern type CB1-4 shown in FIG. 17-14(D), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be either of the fluctuation patterns PB1-4 and PB1-5. The fluctuation pattern type CB1-5 shown in FIG. 17-14(E) is set to a distribution judgment value by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only to the fluctuation pattern PB1-6. The fluctuation pattern type CB1-6 shown in FIG. 17-14(F) is set to a distribution judgment value by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to one of the fluctuation patterns PB1-4 and PB1-5. The fluctuation pattern type CB1-7 shown in FIG. 17-14(G) is set to a distribution judgment value by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only to the fluctuation pattern PB1-7. The fluctuation pattern type CB1-8 shown in FIG. 17-14(H) is set to a distribution judgment value by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only to the fluctuation pattern PB1-8. For the fluctuation pattern type CB1-9 shown in FIG. 17-14(I), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be only the fluctuation pattern PB1-9. For the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 shown in FIG. 17-14(J) and the fluctuation pattern type CB2-2 shown in FIG. 17-14(K), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be any one of the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3.

The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CB3-1 shown in FIG. 17-15(A) so that it can be determined to only the fluctuation pattern PB3-1. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2 shown in FIG. 17-15(B) so that it can be determined to any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 shown in FIG. 17-15(C) and the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 shown in FIG. 17-15(D) so that it can be determined to any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CB3-5 shown in FIG. 17-15(E) so that it can be determined to any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11.

The fluctuation pattern type CB4-1 shown in FIG. 17-16(A) has a distribution judgment value set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only to the fluctuation pattern PB3-2. The fluctuation pattern type CB4-2 shown in FIG. 17-16(B) has a distribution judgment value set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only to the fluctuation pattern PB3-9. The fluctuation pattern type CB4-3 shown in FIG. 17-16(C) has a distribution judgment value set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2. The fluctuation pattern type CB4-4 shown in FIG. 17-16(D) and the fluctuation pattern type CB4-5 shown in FIG. 17-16(E) have a distribution judgment value set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. For the fluctuation pattern type CB4-6 shown in FIG. 17-16 (F), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11.

Figure 17-17 shows an example of a setting of a performance pattern designation command AKB01. In the variation pattern setting process shown in Figure 17-3, in the setting of sending the command at the start of variation by step AKS233, the performance pattern designation command is controlled to be sendable. For example, when the special chart display result is "jackpot", the performance pattern designation command corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type is made sendable. For example, in correspondence with the jackpot types NA01 to NA11 whose jackpot types are included in "normal", the performance pattern designation command is set to one of the commands 8C01 [H], 8C02 [H], 8C0B [H], and 8C0C [H]. In correspondence with the jackpot types KA01 to KA15 whose jackpot types are included in "probable change", the performance pattern designation command is set to one of the commands 8C04 [H] to 8C0A [H]. The performance control board 12 can determine the performance patterns that make up the final performance pattern based on the performance pattern designation command sent from the main board 11.

Figure 17-18 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS121). In this special symbol process timer, the fluctuation time data corresponding to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern is set as the timer initial value in step AKS236 of the fluctuation pattern setting processing shown in Figure 17-3. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS121; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS122), and the special symbol variation processing ends.

When the time count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" in response to step AKS121 (step AKS121; Yes), the special symbol process code is updated to 02 [H], which is a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step AKS123). In addition, the special symbol stop time is set (step AKS124). In step AKS124, time data corresponding to a predetermined special symbol stop time, such as 500 milliseconds, may be set as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer as the special symbol stop time data. In conjunction with the setting of the special symbol stop time, a setting for sending a performance symbol determination command may be performed. Then, it is determined whether the count value of the special symbol counter is "0" or not (step AKS125). When the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol counter is set to a predetermined special symbol counter initial value corresponding to the establishment of the special symbol control condition. If the special symbol control condition is not established, the count value of the special symbol counter is maintained at "0".

If the count value of the high probability counter is other than "0" in response to step AKS125 (step AKS125; No), the count value of the high probability counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS126). Then, it is determined whether the count value of the high probability counter after the update is "0" (step AKS127). If the count value after the update is "0" (step AKS127; Yes), data setting at the end of the high probability state is performed (step AKS128). The data setting at the end of the high probability state includes the specification of a data table at the end of the high probability state and the execution of data set processing. The data table at the end of the high probability state only needs to include clear data for clearing the high probability state flag. This clears the high probability state flag to the off state, and the high probability state control ends in the high probability state.

If the count value of the probability bonus counter is "0" in response to step AKS125 (step AKS125; Yes), if the updated count value is other than "0" in response to step AKS127 (step AKS127; No), or after step AKS128, it is determined whether the count value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step AKS129). When the jackpot game state ends, the time-saving counter is set to a time-saving counter initial value that is predetermined in response to the jackpot type.

If the count value of the time-saving counter is other than "0" in response to step AKS129 (step AKS129; No), the count value of the time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS130). Then, it is determined whether the count value of the time-saving counter after the update is "0" (step AKS131). If the count value after the update is "0" (step AKS131; Yes), data setting at the time-saving end is performed (step AKS132). The data setting at the time-saving end includes specifying a data table at the time-saving end and executing data set processing. The data table at the time-saving end only needs to include clear data for clearing the time-saving flag. As a result, the time-saving flag is cleared to the off state, and the high base control in the time-saving state as the high base state ends.

If the count value of the time-saving counter is "0" in response to step AKS129 (step AKS129; Yes), if the updated count value is other than "0" in response to step AKS131 (step AKS131; No), or after step AKS132, it is determined whether the special period effect designation value is 00 [H] or not (step AKS133). The special period effect designation value is a value stored in the special period effect buffer, and can be set to any value between 00 [H] and 0E [H], for example. When the jackpot game state ends, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot or the presence or absence of a V win can be set as the special period effect designation value. When the game state is normal, the special period effect designation value is set to 00 [H].

If the special period performance designation value is 00 [H] corresponding to step AKS133 (step AKS133; Yes), the special symbol change processing ends. In contrast, if the special period performance designation value is other than 00 [H] (step AKS133; No), the special period performance update setting is performed (step AKS134), and the special symbol change processing ends. In step AKS134, a special period performance setting table is specified to perform the special period performance update setting. The special period performance setting table includes table data for updating the performance state designation value based on the number of times the variable display is executed.

Figure 17-19 shows an example of the configuration of the special period performance setting table AKT01. In the special symbol variation process shown in Figure 17-18, in the special period performance update setting of step AKS134, the special period performance setting table AKT01 can be referenced and the performance state selection designated value can be updated. The special period performance setting table AKT01 is composed of table data for setting the performance state selection designated value and the background designation command in association with the time-saving counter judgment value for each special period performance designated value. The time-saving counter judgment value for each special period performance designated value is compared with the count value of the time-saving counter, and if it matches any of the judgment values, the performance state selection designated value associated with that judgment value is stored in the performance state selection buffer, and command data indicating the background designation command associated with that judgment value is stored in the background designation command buffer or the like.

For example, when the special period performance designation value is 05 [H], if the time-saving counter count value matches the time-saving counter judgment value of "63", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 03 [H], and command data indicating command 9503 [H] is stored as the background designation command. In a similar case, if the time-saving counter count value matches the time-saving counter judgment value of "62", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 07 [H] and command data indicating command 9506 [H] is stored as the background designation command. If the time-saving counter count value matches the time-saving counter judgment value of "1", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H] and command data indicating command 9506 [H] is stored as the background designation command. If the time-saving counter count value matches the time-saving counter judgment value of "0", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and command data indicating command 9500 [H] is stored as the background designation command. If the time-saving counter reaches "0", the special period effect designation value is cleared and initialized to 00 [H]. This allows the control of the effect state corresponding to the special period to end in response to the end of the time-saving control in the time-saving state as the high base state.

Figure 17-20 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS141). The special symbol process timer here has a timer initial value set corresponding to the special symbol stop time in step AKS124 of the special symbol change processing shown in Figure 17-18. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS141; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS142), and the special symbol change processing ends. This causes a wait until the special symbol stop time has elapsed.

If the time count value of the special pattern process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS141 (step AKS141; Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern display result is "jackpot" or not (step AKS143). If the special pattern display result is "jackpot" (step AKS143; Yes), the special pattern process code is updated to 08 [H], which is a value corresponding to the processing before the opening of the large prize opening (step AKS144). In addition, the jackpot type designation value is read (step AKS145). At this time, the jackpot start performance initial value corresponding to the reading result of the jackpot type designation value is set as the initial value in the special pattern process timer (step AKS146). After that, the sending setting of the jackpot start designation command is performed (step AKS147), and the data before the initial opening of the large prize opening is set (step AKS148), and the special pattern stop processing is terminated. The data setting before the first opening of the large prize opening includes the specification of a data table before the first opening of the large prize opening and the execution of data set processing. The data table before the first opening of the large prize opening includes clear data for clearing various data included in the targets to be cleared before the first opening of the large prize opening. The targets to be cleared before the first opening of the large prize opening include a hit flag, a time-saving flag, a time-saving counter, a probability-changing flag, a probability-changing counter, a performance state selection buffer, and a special period performance buffer. Of these, the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter are cleared to end the time-saving control in the time-saving state as the high base state. In addition, the probability-changing flag and the probability-changing counter are cleared to end the probability-changing control in the probability-changing state as the high probability state.

If the special pattern display result is "miss" and not "jackpot" in response to step AKS143 (step AKS143; No), the special pattern process code is cleared and the stored value is initialized to 00 [H] (step AKS149). In addition, data setting after the miss stop is performed (step AKS150), and the special pattern stop processing ends. Data setting after the miss stop includes designation of the data table after the miss stop and execution of the data setting processing. The data table after the miss stop includes clear data for clearing various data included in the setting clear target after the miss stop. The setting clear target after the miss stop may include the demo display flag and the starting port winning designation value. The storage area corresponding to these is cleared by the data set processing included in the data setting after the miss stop, and each stored value is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". By clearing the demo display flag, standby command transmission setting, etc. can be performed in the special pattern normal processing. In addition, in response to the end of the special game, the starting gate winning designation value, which can identify whether it is the first special game or the second special game, is cleared and initialized to 00 [H], which corresponds to "0".

Figure 17-21 shows a setting example AKB02 at the start of a jackpot. In the special pattern stop process, the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed, the jackpot start command, the jackpot start performance time, and the jackpot start performance pattern can be set by the data setting before the first opening of the jackpot opening in step AKS148 based on the jackpot type designation value read out in step AKS145. The jackpot start command is set in the transmission setting in step AKS147. The data table before the first opening of the jackpot opening is composed of table data for setting the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed, the jackpot start command, the jackpot start performance time, and the jackpot start performance pattern in association with the jackpot type specified from the jackpot type designation value. The data indicating the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed set by the data setting before the first opening of the jackpot opening is stored in the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed buffer. The time data corresponding to the jackpot start presentation time set by the data setting before the first opening of the jackpot opening is set as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer. The jackpot start presentation pattern may be set by the presentation control CPU 120 of the presentation control board 12, for example, based on a combination of a presentation symbol designation command and a jackpot start designation command sent from the main board 11.

The maximum number of times the large prize opening is possible corresponds to the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state. In the jackpot start setting example AKB02, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is possible to be set to one of "02", "03", "04", "07", or "10" according to the type of jackpot. Therefore, the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state is set to one of 2 rounds, 3 rounds, 4 rounds, 7 rounds, or 10 rounds. When the upper limit number of times is a 2-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 2-round jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is a 3-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 3-round jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is a 4-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 4-round jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is a 7-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 7-round jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is a 10-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 10-round jackpot.

In the jackpot start time setting example AKB02, the jackpot start presentation time can be set to any of 100 milliseconds, 7500 milliseconds, 8000 milliseconds, and 14000 milliseconds. For example, the jackpot start presentation time can be set to 100 milliseconds in correspondence with the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA11 to KA14. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 17-2, when the high base control is "Yes", it can be determined to be either the jackpot type NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot type KA11 to KA15. On the other hand, when the high base control is "No", the jackpot type NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot type KA11 to KA14 is not determined. Therefore, the jackpot start performance time can be set to a shorter time when the special chart display result is "jackpot" during the period when high base control is being performed in the time-saving state as the high base state, than when the special chart display result is "jackpot" during the period when high base control is not being performed in the low base state. Alternatively, the jackpot start performance time can be set to 14000 milliseconds in response to the jackpot type KA15, and the jackpot start time can be set to a time shorter than 14000 milliseconds in response to other than the jackpot type KA15. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 17-2, when the high base control is "yes", the jackpot type KA15 can be determined at a predetermined rate, and when the high base control is "no", the jackpot type KA15 is not determined. Therefore, the jackpot start presentation time can be set to a longer time when the special chart display results in a "jackpot" during a period when high base control is being performed in a time-saving state in a high base state, than when the special chart display results in a "jackpot" during a period when high base control is not being performed in a low base state.

Figure 17-22 is a flow chart showing an example of jackpot end processing. In jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS161). The special symbol process timer here is set to a timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot end presentation time in the post-opening processing of the jackpot opening selected by the special symbol process processing. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS161; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS162), and the processing ends. This causes the CPU 103 to wait until the jackpot end presentation time has elapsed.

If the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" in response to step AKS161 (step AKS161; Yes), the special symbol process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H] (step AKS163). In addition, the jackpot type designation value is read (step AKS164), and the specific area passing flag is confirmed (step AKS165). The specific area passing flag is set to the ON state when the specific area switch 24 detects a game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 in response to the execution of a round in the jackpot game state. In contrast, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning area 51 and is not detected by the specific area switch 24, the specific area passing flag is maintained in the OFF state.

After step AKS165, the state setting at the end of the jackpot (step AKS166), the command transmission setting at the end of the jackpot (step AKS167), and the data setting at the end of the jackpot (AKS168) are performed, and the process ends. The state setting at the end of the jackpot includes settings related to the game state and the performance state after the end of the jackpot game state, and it is sufficient if it is possible to set the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter initial value, the probability flag and the probability counter initial value, the special period performance designation value, and the performance state selection designation value, etc., in accordance with the type of jackpot and the presence or absence of V winning. The command transmission setting at the end of the jackpot may include the designation of the command table at the end of the jackpot and the execution of the command set process. The command table at the end of the jackpot includes table data for transmitting the performance control command at the end of the jackpot in response to the end of the jackpot game state. For example, the performance control command at the end of the jackpot may include the jackpot end designation command and the background designation command. The data setting at the end of the jackpot may include the specification of a data table at the end of the jackpot and the execution of a data set process. The data table at the end of the jackpot includes clear data for clearing various data included in the target for clearing at the end of the jackpot. The target for clearing at the end of the jackpot may include a demo display flag, a variable command designation buffer, a maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened buffer, a start port winning designation value, etc. The storage areas corresponding to these are cleared by the data set process included in the data setting at the end of the jackpot, and each stored value, etc. is initialized to a value corresponding to "0".

Figure 17-23 shows a jackpot end setting example AKB11. The jackpot end setting example AKB11 allows the time-saving counter initial value, jackpot end presentation time, and presentation state selection designated value to be set in accordance with the jackpot type when the jackpot game state ends. The time-saving counter initial value can be set by the jackpot end state setting in step AKS166 of the jackpot end processing. The jackpot end presentation time and presentation state selection designated value only need to be set in conjunction with the update of the special symbol process code in the post-opening processing of the large prize opening selected by the special symbol process processing.

The time-saving counter initial value corresponds to the upper limit number of times that the variable display can be executed in the time-saving state as the high base state. In the jackpot end setting example AKB11, the time-saving counter initial value can be set to any of "8", "70", "100", "570", or "10,000" depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, the upper limit number of times that the variable display can be executed in the time-saving state as the high base state is set to any of 8, 70, 100, 570, or 10,000.

The initial value of the probability change counter can be set to "70" when the specific area passing flag is on, corresponding to a V win. In contrast, when the specific area passing flag is off, corresponding to no V win, the initial value of the probability change counter is set to "0". Therefore, the upper limit number of times that the variable display can be executed in the probability change state as a high probability state is set to 70 times based on the establishment of the probability change control condition due to the occurrence of a V win in the jackpot game state.

The upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state as the high base state may be set to a common number of times or a different number of times compared to the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the high probability state as the high probability state. For example, when the time-saving counter initial value is set to "8", the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state is 8 times, which is less than the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the high probability state, which is 70 times. In contrast, when the time-saving counter initial value is set to either "570" or "10000", the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state is 570 times or 10000 times, which is greater than the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the high probability state, which is 70 times. On the other hand, when the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70", the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state is a common number to the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the high probability state, which is 70 times.

The initial value of the probability variable counter, "70", which can be set in response to the control of the probability variable state, is also included in the initial value of the time-saving counter which can be set in response to the control of the time-saving state, and becomes the first number of times that the variable display can be executed in the first state. When such an initial value of the probability variable counter and the time-saving counter are set to "70", the high probability high base state in which high base control is performed together with the probability variable control becomes the first state that can be controlled until the first number of variable displays are executed after the end of the advantageous jackpot game state. In the example of the setting at the end of the jackpot AKB11, when there is a V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to any of the jackpot types NA05 to NA07 or jackpot types KA02, KA04 to KA15, the initial value of the probability variable counter and the time-saving counter are set to "70", and the state is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state. However, in a jackpot game state that corresponds to any of the jackpot types NA05 to NA07 that are included in the "normal" jackpot type, the operation of the distribution member that serves as the V winning opening opening member is controlled so that the game ball is less likely to pass through the V winning area 51.

The "10000" included in the time-saving counter initial value that can be set in response to the control of the time-saving state is the second number of times that the variable display can be executed in the second state. Therefore, when the probability variable counter initial value is "0" and the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000", the low probability high base state in which there is no probability variable control and high base control is performed becomes the second state that can be controlled until the variable display is executed more than the first number of times after the end of the advantageous jackpot game state. In the jackpot end setting example AKB11, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to any of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000", and the game is controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Here, since the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 are included in the jackpot type "normal", the game ball is unlikely to pass through the V winning area 51 in the jackpot game state, and the probability variable counter initial value becomes "0" at a high rate.

In the jackpot end time setting example AKB11, the jackpot end presentation time can be set to 3500 milliseconds, 9500 milliseconds, or 48000 milliseconds, corresponding to the jackpot type. For example, the jackpot end presentation time can be set to 3500 milliseconds, corresponding to the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and KA11 to KA15. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 17-2, when the high base control is "Yes", it can be determined to be either the jackpot type NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot type KA11 to KA15. On the other hand, when the high base control is "No", the jackpot type NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot type KA11 to KA14 is not determined. Therefore, the jackpot end presentation time can be set to a shorter time when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" during a period when high base control is being performed in a time-saving state in a high base state, than when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" during a period when high base control is not being performed in a low base state.

In the jackpot end setting example AKB11, the presentation state selection designated value can be set to either 02 [H] or 06 [H] depending on the jackpot type. For example, the presentation state selection designated value can be set to 06 [H] depending on the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and KA11 to KA15. In contrast, the presentation state selection designated value can be set to 02 [H] or 06 [H] depending on the jackpot types NA01 to NA07 and KA01 to KA10. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 17-2, when the high base control is "Yes", it can be determined to either the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot types KA11 to KA15. On the other hand, when high base control is "none", the jackpot types NA08-NA11 and KA11-KA14 are not determined. Therefore, when the special chart display result is "jackpot" during a low base state period when high base control is not being performed, the presentation state selection designation value corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state may be set to the same value as when the special chart display result is "jackpot" during a period when high base control is being performed in a time-saving state as a high base state, or it may be set to a different value.

Figure 17-24 shows a jackpot end setting example AKB12. The jackpot end setting example AKB12 allows the jackpot end designation command, the special period presentation designation value, and the post-jackpot background designation to be set in response to the jackpot types NA01 to NA11 whose jackpot types are included in "normal" when the jackpot game state ends. The jackpot end designation command can be set by the jackpot end command transmission setting in step AKS167 of the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 17-22. The special period presentation designation value can be set by the jackpot end state setting in step AKS166 of the jackpot end processing. The post-jackpot background designation can be set by the jackpot end data setting in step AKS168 of the jackpot end processing, and command data indicating the background designation command is stored in a background designation command buffer or the like. In addition, the jackpot end command transmission setting in step AKS167 of the jackpot end processing may be set to enable sending of a background specification command corresponding to the background specification after the jackpot.

For example, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA01, command A300 [H] is sent as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 01 [H], and command data indicating command 9502 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the post-jackpot background designation. In contrast, when there is a V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA01, command A300 [H] is sent as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 02 [H], and command data indicating 9508 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the post-jackpot background designation. Also, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA02, command A301 [H] is sent as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 03 [H], and command data indicating command 9502 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the post-jackpot background designation. In contrast, when a V win occurs during a jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot type NA02, command A307 [H] is sent as a jackpot end command, the special period performance designation value is set to 04 [H], and command data indicating 9503 [H] is stored as a background designation command that designates the post-jackpot background. Settings corresponding to other jackpot types and the presence or absence of a V win are as shown in Figure 17-24.

Figure 17-25 shows a jackpot end setting example AKB13. The jackpot end setting example AKB13 allows the jackpot end designation command, special period presentation designation value, and post-jackpot background designation to be set in correspondence with the jackpot types KA01 to KA15 whose jackpot types are included in "probable change" when the jackpot game state ends. For example, when there is no V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA01, command A300 [H] is sent as the jackpot end designation command, the special period presentation designation value is set to 01 [H], and command data indicating command 9502 [H] is stored as the background designation command that designates the post-jackpot background. On the other hand, when there is a V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA01, the command A300 [H] is transmitted as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 02 [H], and command data indicating 9508 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the jackpot post-background designation. Also, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA02, the command A302 [H] is transmitted as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 06 [H], and command data indicating 9503 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the jackpot post-background designation. On the other hand, when there is a V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA02, the command A302 [H] is transmitted as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 05 [H], and command data indicating 9503 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the jackpot post-background designation. Settings for other types of jackpots and whether or not a V win occurs are as shown in Figure 17-25.

Figure 17-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern change start process. In the effect pattern change start process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern, etc., which will be the confirmed effect pattern as the display result of the effect pattern (step AKS501). The effect control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display content, such as the variable display result corresponding to the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the jackpot type that can be specified from the effect pattern designation command. As an example, the variable display content corresponding to the combination of the variable pattern and the variable display result may be "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probable jackpot (jackpot)", and "probable jackpot (jackpot)".

With the example of the command setting AKB01 for specifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 17-17 and the example of the command setting AKB02 for the start of the jackpot shown in FIG. 17-21, each command for specifying the effect pattern can notify the following decision contents. In the case of command 8C01 [H], the jackpot type is included in "normal" and it becomes a 3-round jackpot, in the case of command 8C02 [H], the jackpot type is included in "normal" and it becomes a 3-round or 4-round jackpot, in the case of command 8C03 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probable change" and it becomes a 2-round jackpot, in the case of command 8C04 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probable change" and it becomes a 3-round jackpot, in the case of command 8C05 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probable change" and it becomes a 3-round or 4-round jackpot, and in the case of command 8C06 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probable change" and it becomes a 7-round jackpot. In addition, if the command is 8C07[H], the jackpot type will be included in "probable chance" and it will be a 10 round jackpot, if the command is 8C08[H], the jackpot type will be included in "probable chance" and it will be a 10 round jackpot, if the command is 8C09[H], the jackpot type will be included in "probable chance" and it will be a 3 round jackpot, if the command is 8C0A[H], the jackpot type will be included in "probable chance" and it will be a 3 round jackpot, if the command is 8C0B[H], the jackpot type will be included in "normal" and it will be a 2 round jackpot, if the command is 8C0C[H], the jackpot type will be included in "normal" and it will be a 7 round jackpot.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," the variable display of the performance pattern does not go into reach mode, the confirmed performance pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display is "miss." When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," the variable display of the performance pattern goes into reach mode, and then the confirmed performance pattern of the reach miss combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display is "miss." When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display is "jackpot," making it difficult for a V win to occur in a jackpot game state. When the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display is "jackpot," making it easier for a V win to occur in a jackpot game state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)", different (mismatched) performance patterns are determined as the final stop patterns in the "left" and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5R. When the variable display content is "reach (miss)", the same (matched) performance patterns are determined as the final stop patterns in the "left" and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In this case, the center confirmed performance pattern displayed as stopped in the "center" performance pattern display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 among the confirmed performance patterns is determined as a performance pattern different from the confirmed performance patterns on the left and right. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)" or "probability change (jackpot)", the same (matched) performance patterns are determined as the final stop patterns in the "left", "center", and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. At this time, it is only necessary to determine whether the fixed performance pattern is a normal pattern (e.g., a performance pattern showing an even number) or a performance pattern showing a probability variable (e.g., a performance pattern showing an odd number) depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)" or "probability variable (jackpot)" and whether the promotion performance during the jackpot is executed or not. The promotion performance during the jackpot is a performance in which a combination of performance patterns (non-probability variable jackpot combination) that reminds one of a jackpot but does not remind one of a probability variable state is temporarily displayed on the image display device 5, and then whether or not the probability variable state will be entered during the jackpot game state or at the end of the jackpot game state is notified. When the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)", a fixed performance pattern is determined from among multiple types of normal patterns. Also, when the variable display content is "probability variable (jackpot)" and it is determined that the promotion performance during the jackpot is not executed, a fixed performance pattern is determined from among multiple types of probability variable patterns. In contrast, when it is decided to execute the jackpot promotion effect even if the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the fixed effect pattern is selected from among a number of types of normal patterns. This prevents the jackpot promotion effect from being executed even if the fixed effect pattern is derived and displayed in a line of probability change patterns, and thus prevents the player from feeling suspicious.

After the final stop pattern etc. is determined in step AKS501, it is determined whether the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is for result display (step AKS502). In the probability variation state or time-saving state, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches 70 times, the result display can be executed. The result display is a display of information on the results of the game value acquired by the player, such as the total number of prize balls acquired by the player in the jackpot game state and the number of consecutive jackpots. The number of consecutive jackpots is also called the number of consecutive jackpots. In the failure variation pattern shown in FIG. 17-4, during the execution of the variable display by any of the variation patterns PB1-6 to PB1-9 from the first final during time-saving to the fourth final during time-saving, the result display can be executed, and a value announcement can be executed to announce the result of the value acquired by the player. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 17-5, when the variable display by either the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 or the fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is the 70th variable display in the high probability state or the time-saving state, a result display may be performed during the execution of the variable display, and a value notification may be executed to notify the result of the value acquired by the player. In step AKS502, when the variable display is the 70th variable display in the high probability state or the time-saving state, it may be determined that the fluctuation patterns PB1-6 to PB1-9 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 are the fluctuation patterns for the result display. The value notification may include the provision of information regarding any value acquired by the player.

If the variable pattern corresponds to step AKS502 and is for result display (step AKS502; Yes), a result display control setting is performed (step AKS503). The result display control setting is a setting for controlling the execution of a result display that is a value notification while the variable display is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may select a performance pattern provided for result display and set the result display to be executable while the variable display is being executed.

After step AKS503, it is determined whether the variation pattern is for a status notification effect (step AKS504). When a result display is performed during the execution of the variable display, the status notification effect may or may not be executed. The status notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the time-saving state continues even after the number of times the variable display is executed reaches 70 times when the upper limit number of times the variable display can be executed in the time-saving state is 10,000 times. In the miss variation pattern shown in FIG. 17-4, a status notification effect is performed during the execution of the variable display by the fourth and final variation pattern PB1-9 during the time-saving state, and a notification can be executed that the time-saving state has an upper limit of 10,000 times of the variable display. In step AKS504, it is sufficient to determine that the variation pattern is for a status notification effect in correspondence with the variation pattern PB1-9.

If the variable pattern corresponds to step AKS504 and is for a status notification effect (step AKS504; Yes), a status notification effect control setting is performed (step AKS505). The status notification effect control setting is a setting for controlling the execution of notifications by status notification effects while variable display is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may select an effect pattern provided for a status notification effect and set the status notification effect to be executable while variable display is being executed. The status notification effect may include the display of a specific image, such as an effect image of a button display imitating push button 31B.

If the variation pattern is not for the result display corresponding to step AKS502 (step AKS502; No), if the variation pattern is not for the status left performance corresponding to step AKS504 (step AKS504; No), or following step AKS505, other variable display performances are determined (step AKS506). For example, the presence or absence of a preview performance or the preview performance pattern when it is executed may be determined. After that, the performance control pattern is determined (step AKS507). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared performance control patterns (performance control pattern at the time of special chart variation) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may select a prepared performance control pattern (result display control pattern) in response to the execution of the result display and set it as the usage pattern. In response to the execution of the status notification performance, a prepared performance control pattern (status notification performance control pattern) may be selected and set as the usage pattern. In response to the execution of the preview performance, a prepared performance control pattern (preview performance control pattern) may be selected and set as the pattern to be used. Note that the presenter is not limited to setting separate performance control patterns as the special chart change performance control pattern, the result display control pattern, the status notification performance control pattern, the preview performance control pattern, or some or all of these, and may set one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of the execution settings of each performance.

After step AKS507, the initial value of the performance control process timer is set in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (step AKS508). The performance control process timer is provided, for example, at a predetermined address in the RAM 102, and data indicating the time measurement value used for performance control can be stored and memorized. In addition, a setting is made to start the variation of the performance pattern, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS509). At this time, for example, the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step AKS507 may be used to start the variation of the performance pattern in each of the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Accordingly, in accordance with the start of the variable display, a setting is made to update the reserved display on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS510). Then, the performance process code is updated to 02 [H], which is a value corresponding to the processing during the variation of the performance pattern (step AKS511), and the performance pattern variation start processing is terminated.

Figure 17-27 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during the change of the performance pattern. In the processing during the change of the performance pattern, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the special pattern change time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the change pattern, has elapsed, for example, based on the measured value of the performance control process timer (step AKS521). In order to measure the variable display time, an update is performed, such as by subtracting 1 from the measured value of the performance control process timer. In step AKS521, it may be judged that the variable display time has elapsed when, for example, an end code is read out from the performance control pattern corresponding to the measured value of the performance control process timer after the update.

If the variable display time corresponding to step AKS521 has not elapsed (step AKS521; No), it is determined whether or not it is the preview performance period (step AKS522). The preview performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (preview performance control pattern, etc.) determined in step AKS507 of the performance pattern variation start processing. If it is the preview performance period (step AKS522; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step AKS523).

If it is not the preview performance period corresponding to step AKS522 (step AKS522; No), or after the control by step AKS523, it is determined whether it is the result display period (step AKS524). The result display period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (such as the result display control pattern) determined in step AKS507 of the performance pattern change start processing. If it is the result display period (step AKS524; Yes), control is performed to execute the result display (step AKS525). If it is not the result display period (step AKS524; No), or after the control by step AKS525, it is determined whether it is the status notification performance period (step AKS526). The status notification performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (such as the status notification performance control pattern) determined in step AKS507 of the performance pattern change start processing. If it is the status notification display period (step AKS526; Yes), control is performed to execute the status notification display (step ASK527). In this way, by controlling step AKS525, it is possible to execute a result display that serves as a value notification during the variable display. Also, by controlling step AKS527, it is possible to execute a status notification display that includes a notification that the second state is a low probability high base state during the variable display.

If it is not the status notification display period corresponding to step AKS526 (step AKS526; No), or after the control by step AKS527, it is determined whether or not it is the reach display period (step AKS528). The reach display period may be predetermined, for example, in the display control pattern (such as the display control pattern during special pattern change) determined in step AKS507 of the display pattern change start processing. If it is the reach display period (step AKS528; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach display (step AKS529). If it is not the reach display period (step AKS528; No), or after the control by step AKS529, control is performed to execute the display during the variable display, including the variable display operation of the display pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the display control pattern determined corresponding to the change pattern (step AKS530), and the processing during the display pattern change is terminated.

When the variable display time has elapsed in response to step AKS521 (step AKS521; Yes), it is determined whether or not a performance pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS531). At this time, if the performance pattern determination command has not been received (step AKS531; No), the processing during the performance pattern change is terminated and the processing waits. In addition, in response to the elapse of a predetermined time without receiving a performance pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, it may be assumed that the performance pattern determination command was not received normally, and a predetermined error processing may be executed. When the performance pattern determination command has been received (step AKS531; Yes), control is performed to cause the final stop pattern, which is the display result in the variable display of the performance pattern, to be derived and displayed as a stop display (step AKS532). In addition, a predetermined time is set as a waiting time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step AKS533). Then, the effect process code is updated to 03 [H], which is the value corresponding to the effect pattern change stop processing (step AKS534), and the effect pattern change processing ends.

Next, various control examples related to the characteristic part 23AK will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1, during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is being performed, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is executed, and the special symbol display result may be a "jackpot". Such a jackpot is also called a first special symbol jackpot during a high base. In this case, based on the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 17-2, high base control is "yes", so the jackpot type is determined to be either jackpot type NA08, which includes the "normal" jackpot type, or jackpot types KA11 and KA15, which include the "probable" jackpot type. In the jackpot end time setting AKB11 shown in Fig. 17-23, in the case of the jackpot type NA08, the time-saving counter initial value "570" and the presentation state selection designated value 06 [H] are set, and in the case of the jackpot types KA11 and KA15, the time-saving counter initial value "70" and the presentation state selection designated value 06 [H] are set. In addition, since the jackpot type NA08, which is included in the jackpot type "normal", is unlikely to cause a V win, in the jackpot end time setting example AKB12 shown in Fig. 17-24, if there is no V win for the jackpot type NA08, the special period presentation designated value is set to 0C [H]. In contrast, since jackpot types KA11 and KA15, which are included in the "probable chance" jackpot type, are more likely to result in a V win, in the jackpot end setting example AKB13 shown in Figure 17-25, if there is a V win for jackpot types KA11 and KA15, the special period performance designation value is set to 07 [H].

Figure 17-28 shows an example of control of the presentation state AKC01 based on the first special chart jackpot during a high base. When the first special chart jackpot during a high base is of jackpot type NA08, the special presentation period designation value is set to 0C [H] in response to no V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "570", and the presentation state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, in response to the end of the variable display, the count value of the time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in step AKS130 of the special pattern variation processing shown in Figure 17-18. Accordingly, in step AKS133, it is determined that the special period presentation designation value is other than 00 [H], and the special period presentation update setting is performed in step AKS134. In the special period effect setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 17-19, when the special effect period designation value is 0C [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "566", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 08 [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "501", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 09 [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "500", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0A [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "1", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0B [H], and when the time-saving counter count value is "0", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized.

When the first special chart jackpot during the high base is either jackpot type KA11 or KA15, the special period performance designation value is set to 07 [H] in response to a V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70", and the performance state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the time-saving counter count value is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period performance update setting is performed. In the special period performance setting table AKT01 shown in Figure 17-19, when the special performance period designation value is 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "66", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "1", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H], and when the time-saving counter count value becomes "0", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized.

In the reference table AKA01 for a losing game shown in FIG. 17-6 (A), a reference table corresponding to the presentation state selection value is specified, and a variation pattern can be determined using different reference tables. For example, when the presentation state selection value is 06 [H], reference table TS02 is specified, when the presentation state selection value is 07 [H], reference table TS03 is specified, when the presentation state selection value is 09 [H], reference table TS05 is specified, when the presentation state selection value is 0A [H], reference table TS06 is specified, when the presentation state selection value is 0B [H], reference table TS07 is specified, and when the presentation state selection value is 0C [H], reference table TS08 is specified. In the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 17-6 (C), when the start-gate winning value is "2", either of the selection tables TB20 and TB21 associated with the second reserved memory number can be specified as the variation pattern type selection table. In the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 17-6 (D), when the start port winning designation value is "2", either of the selection tables TB22 and TB23 associated with the second reserved memory number can be designated as the variation pattern type selection table. In this way, the variation pattern can be determined using a variation pattern type selection table that is composed of different table data corresponding to the performance state selection designation value.

In the pachinko game machine 1, during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is performed, a special game using a second special symbol may be executed, and the special symbol display result may be a "jackpot". Such a jackpot is also called a second special symbol jackpot during a high base. In this case, based on the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 17-2, the jackpot type is determined to be one of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, which are included in the "normal" jackpot type, and the jackpot type KA12 to KA15, which are included in the "probable change" jackpot type. In the jackpot end time setting AKB11 shown in FIG. 17-23, the time-saving counter initial value "10000" and the presentation state selection designated value 06 [H] are set for the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, and the time-saving counter initial value "70" and the presentation state selection designated value 06 [H] are set for the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. In addition, since V winning is unlikely to occur for jackpot types NA09 to NA11 included in the "normal" jackpot type, in the jackpot end setting example AKB12 shown in FIG. 17-24, if there is no V winning for jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the special period effect designation value is set to 0E [H]. In contrast, V winning is likely to occur for jackpot types KA12 to KA15 included in the "probable change" jackpot type, so in the jackpot end setting example AKB13 shown in FIG. 17-25, if there is a V winning for jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the special period effect designation value is set to 07 [H].

Figure 17-29 shows an example of control of the presentation state AKC02 based on the second special chart jackpot during a high base. When the second special chart jackpot during a high base is of jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the special presentation period designation value is set to 0E [H] in response to no V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000", and the presentation state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the count value of the time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period presentation update setting is performed. In the special period effect setting table AKT01 shown in Figure 17-19, when the special effect period designation value is 0E [H], when the time-saving counter count value reaches "9996", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 08 [H], when the time-saving counter count value reaches "9931", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0D [H], when the time-saving counter count value reaches "9930", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0E [H], and when the time-saving counter count value reaches "0", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized.

When the high base second special chart jackpot is of jackpot type KA12 to KA15, the special period performance designation value is set to 07 [H] in response to the presence of a V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70", and the performance state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the time-saving counter count value is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period performance update setting is performed. In the special period performance setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 17-19, when the special performance period designation value is 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "66", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "1", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H], and when the time-saving counter count value becomes "0", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized.

When the 2nd special chart jackpot during the high base was controlled to a low probability high base state based on the jackpot type NA09-NA11 and the 69th variable display is completed, the time-saving counter count is updated to "9931". As a result, the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0D [H], and then when the 70th variable display starts, the special chart display result corresponds to "miss", and the reference table TS09 is designated in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (A). The reference table TS09 shown in FIG. 17-7 (E) allows table TB15 to be designated as a variation pattern type selection table regardless of the start port winning designation value, the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved memory number. The table TB15 shown in FIG. 17-10 (F) allows only the variation pattern type CB1-9 to be selected. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-9 shown in FIG. 17-14 (I), only the fluctuation pattern PB1-9 can be determined. In this way, the fluctuation pattern PB1-9 can be determined in response to the 70th variable display in the low probability high base state where the time-saving counter initial value is "10000".

When the 2nd special chart jackpot during the high base was controlled to a high probability high base state based on the jackpot type KA12-KA15 and the 69th variable display is completed, the time-saving counter count is updated to "1". As a result, the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H], and when the 70th variable display is started, the special chart display result corresponds to "miss", and the reference table TS08 is designated in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (A). The reference table TS08 shown in FIG. 17-7 (D) allows table TB14 to be designated as a variation pattern type selection table regardless of the start port winning designation value or the first and second reserved memory numbers. The table TB14 shown in FIG. 17-10 (E) allows only the variation pattern types CB1-8 to be selected. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-8 shown in FIG. 17-14 (H), only the fluctuation pattern PB1-8 can be determined. In this way, the fluctuation pattern PB1-8 can be determined in response to the 70th variable display in the high probability high base where the time-saving counter initial value is "70".

Figure 17-30 (A) shows a variable display control example AKC11 corresponding to the presentation state selection designation values 0C [H] and 0D [H]. When the presentation state selection designation value is 0C [H], the game state is a high probability high base state, and if the variable display result including the special chart display result is a "miss", it can only be determined to the variation pattern type CB1-8 and can only be determined to the variation pattern PB1-8. In the configuration example of the miss variation pattern shown in Figure 17-4, the variation pattern PB1-8 corresponds to the third final during the time reduction, and the special chart variation time is set to 12,500 milliseconds. In contrast, when the presentation state selection designation value is 0D [H], the game state is a low probability high base state, and if the variable display result including the special chart display result is a "miss", it can only be determined to the variation pattern type CB1-9 and can only be determined to the variation pattern PB1-9. In the example of the failure fluctuation pattern shown in Figure 17-4, the fluctuation pattern PB1-9 corresponds to the fourth final time during the time-saving period, and the special chart fluctuation time is set to 29,900 milliseconds.

In step AKS502 of the effect symbol change start processing shown in FIG. 17-26, in both the change patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9, it is determined that the change pattern is for result display, and result display control setting is performed in step AKS503. Based on this setting, in step AKS525 of the effect symbol change in progress processing shown in FIG. 17-27, control is performed to execute the result display, and a result display can be executed as a value notification that notifies the player of the result of the value acquired. Also, in step AKS504 of the effect symbol change start processing shown in FIG. 17-26, in the case of the change pattern PB1-9, it is determined that the change pattern is for status notification effect, and status notification effect control setting is performed in step AKS505. Based on this setting, in step AKS527 of the processing during the change in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 17-27, control is performed to execute the status notification performance, and a notification is issued that the time-saving counter initial value is in a low-probability high-base state based on the setting of "10000."

As described above, the low-probability high base state and the high-probability high base state in which the special game using the second special symbol is more likely to be executed by the high base control than in the normal state include, for example, a high-probability high base state that corresponds to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 and can be controlled until 70 variable displays are executed after the jackpot game state ends, corresponding to the first number of times that the time-saving counter initial value is "70," and a low-probability high base state that corresponds to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and can be controlled until 10,000 variable displays are executed after the jackpot game state ends, corresponding to the second number of times that the time-saving counter initial value is "10,000," which is greater than the first number of times. The high-probability high base state in this case corresponds to the first state, and the low-probability high base state corresponds to the second state. Among these, the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined in response to the execution number of the variable display during the high probability high base state being "70" as the first number, and the variation pattern PB1-9 can be determined in response to the execution number of the variable display during the low probability high base state being "70" as the first number. At this time, the variation pattern PB1-8 corresponds to the first variable display pattern, and the variation pattern PB1-9 corresponds to the second variable display pattern. Then, a result display that becomes a value notification is executed during the variable display by the variation pattern PB1-8. Also, a result display that becomes a value notification and a state notification performance including a notification regarding the low probability low base state are executed during the variable display by the variation pattern PB1-9. Here, when comparing the special chart variation time, 29900 milliseconds in the variation pattern PB1-9 are longer than 12500 milliseconds in the variation pattern PB1-8. This allows the special chart change time and notification content to be different between the change pattern PB1-8 corresponding to the first variable display pattern and the change pattern PB1-9 corresponding to the second variable display pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the variable display.

In addition, when the number of variable displays is the first number of "70" during a high probability high base state corresponding to the first state and during a low probability high base state corresponding to the second state, the variable pattern can be determined using table data from a variable pattern determination table that provides different determination data corresponding to the variable pattern types CB1-8 and CB1-9, respectively. In this way, since the variable pattern is determined using different determination data, the 70th variable display corresponding to the first number can be appropriately executed, thereby increasing the interest in the variable display.

In the variable display control example AKC11, when the number of times the variable display is executed is "70" as the first number in the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state, the variable pattern PB1-8 that can be determined so that the special chart display result corresponds to "miss" corresponds to the first non-specific pattern. Also, when the number of times the variable display is executed is "70" as the first number in the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state, the variable pattern PB1-9 that can be determined so that the special chart display result corresponds to "miss" corresponds to the second non-specific pattern. And, the variable pattern PB1-8 that corresponds to the first non-specific pattern has a special chart fluctuation time of 12500 milliseconds, and the variable pattern PB1-9 that corresponds to the second non-specific pattern has a special chart fluctuation time of 29900 milliseconds, which is more than twice as long. In both cases of the variable patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9, they are result display fluctuation patterns, so a result display that is a value notification is executed during each variable display. Furthermore, in the case of the variable pattern PB1-9, since it is a variable pattern for state notification performance, a notification is executed during the variable display that the second state is a low probability high base state. This allows the 70th variable display corresponding to the first number to be executed appropriately, increasing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

Figure 17-30 (B) shows a jackpot control example AKC12 corresponding to jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA15. In the jackpot start time setting example AKB02 shown in Figure 17-21, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "02" for jackpot type NA09, "04" for jackpot type NA10, "07" for jackpot type NA11, "02" for jackpot type KA12, "04" for jackpot type KA13, "07" for jackpot type KA14, and "10" for jackpot type KA15. Also, in the example AKB11 of the jackpot end setting shown in FIG. 17-23, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000" corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, and to "70" corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. The time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000" only when the jackpot types are any of NA09 to NA11, and is not set for other jackpot types. In the example AKD01 of the jackpot type determination shown in FIG. 17-2, the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 can be determined in response to "Yes" where high base control is performed and the start port winning designated value "2" where the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed. On the other hand, the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 are not determined in response to "No" where high base control is not performed and the start port winning designated value "2". In addition, when the high base control is "off" or "on," the jackpot type is not determined to be NA09 to NA11, corresponding to the start port winning designation value "1" where the special game using the first special symbol is executed.

As a result of the above, during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is being performed, the time-saving counter initial value may be controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state corresponding to the setting of "10000" based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol being a "jackpot". On the other hand, during a low base in which high base control is not being performed, there is no case where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol being a "jackpot". Also, during a high base and a low base, there is no case where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the first special symbol being a "jackpot". In this way, the interest in the variable display can be increased by control corresponding to the presence or absence of high base control and the special symbol whose display result is a "jackpot".

In the jackpot control example AKC12, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is set to "10" is the case of jackpot type KA15. For other jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA14, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is less than "10". Jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA15 can all be determined in response to "Yes", where high base control is performed, and the start port winning designated value "2", where a special game using the second special symbol is played. In this way, the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol becoming "jackpot" during the high base such as the time-saving state in which the high base control is performed includes the first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 which is a 10-round jackpot, and the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and KA12 to KA14 which have fewer rounds than the 10-round jackpot. After the first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 ends, the time-saving counter initial value may be controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state based on the setting of "70", and there is no case where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000". In contrast, after the end of the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA12 to KA14, there are cases where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state as the first state based on a setting of "70", and cases where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state as the second state based on a setting of "10000". As a result, when the second jackpot game state is in a state with a small number of rounds, the time-saving counter initial value may be controlled to a low-probability, high-base state as the second state with a large number of rounds, which prevents the player from being disadvantaged and increases the game interest regarding the variable display.

In the jackpot control example AKC12, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "10" in the case of the jackpot type KA15, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "07" in the case of the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "04" in the case of the jackpot types NA10 and KA13. Of these, the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot type KA15 corresponds to the first jackpot game state, the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot types NA11 and KA14 corresponds to the second jackpot game state which has fewer rounds than the first jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot types NA10 and KA13 corresponds to the third jackpot game state which has fewer rounds than the second jackpot game state. The jackpot types NA10, NA11 and the jackpot types KA13 to KA15 can be determined in accordance with "Yes" where high base control is performed and the start-port prize-winning designated value "2" where the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed. In this way, the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol becoming "jackpot" during the high base such as the time-saving state where high base control is performed includes the first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 which is a 10-round jackpot, the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA11, KA14 which are 7-round jackpots with fewer rounds than the 10-round jackpot, and the third jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA10, KA13 which are 4-round jackpots with fewer rounds than the 7-round jackpot. After the first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 ends, the time-saving counter initial value may be controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state based on the setting of "70", and there is no case where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000". On the other hand, after the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and NA11 and the jackpot types KA13 and KA14 ends, there are cases where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state based on the setting of "70", and cases where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000". The high base determination rate of the jackpot type KA13 is 25%, which is lower than the high base determination rate of the jackpot type KA14, which is 31%. On the other hand, the high base determination rates of the jackpot types NA10 and NA11 are both 2%. Therefore, after the end of the third jackpot game state corresponding to a four-round jackpot, the second state can be controlled to a low-probability, high-base state based on the setting of the time-saving counter initial value of "10,000" at a higher rate than after the end of the second jackpot game state corresponding to a seven-round jackpot. This prevents the player from being disadvantaged and increases the interest in the variable display by increasing the rate at which the second state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state with a large time-saving counter initial value when the third jackpot game state has a small number of rounds.

In the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8, when the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H], if the jackpot type is either NA10 or KA13, table TB32 is designated as the fluctuation pattern type selection table, and if the jackpot type is either NA11 or KA14, table TB33 is designated as the fluctuation pattern type selection table. Table TB32 shown in FIG. 17-11 (F) can select only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3. Table TB33 shown in FIG. 17-11 (G) can select only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4. In this way, in the case of a 4-round jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type NA10 and the jackpot type KA13, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 shown in FIG. 17-15 (C). In addition, in the case of a 7-round jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type NA11 and the jackpot type KA14, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 shown in FIG. 17-15 (D). Therefore, in the case of being controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the second jackpot game state corresponding to the 7-round jackpot and in the case of being controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state, the fluctuation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the common fluctuation pattern type CB3-4. In addition, in the case of being controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the third jackpot game state corresponding to the 4-round jackpot and in the case of being controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state, the fluctuation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the common fluctuation pattern type CB3-3. Here, the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 corresponds to the first data, and the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 corresponds to the second data. In this way, by determining the fluctuation pattern using data corresponding to a common fluctuation pattern type, the commonality of the variable display is increased, making it difficult to distinguish whether the state is a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, thereby improving the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

Figure 17-30 (C) shows a jackpot presentation control example AKC13 corresponding to jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA15. In the jackpot presentation control example AKC13, as in the jackpot control example AKC12, the number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "10" for jackpot type KA15, the number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "07" for jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and the number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "04" for jackpot types NA10 and KA13. Among these, the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is KA15 corresponds to the first jackpot game state, the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is NA11, KA14 corresponds to the second jackpot game state which has fewer rounds than the first jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is NA10, KA13 corresponds to the third jackpot game state which has fewer rounds than the second jackpot game state. In the jackpot start setting example AKB02 shown in Figure 17-21, the jackpot start performance pattern is set to a common pattern APA33 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10, KA13, and a common pattern APA34 corresponding to the jackpot types NA11, KA14, respectively. Therefore, when the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot is started, the jackpot start performance can be executed by the common jackpot start performance pattern APA34 in the case where the state is controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, when the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot is started, the jackpot start performance can be executed by the common jackpot start performance pattern APA33 in the case where the state is controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, by executing the jackpot start performance by the common jackpot start performance pattern, it is difficult to recognize whether the state is a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state when the jackpot start performance is executed, and the game interest regarding the variable display can be improved.

In the jackpot performance control example AKC13, the jackpot performance pattern is set to a common pattern APB33 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, and to a common pattern APB34 corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14. Therefore, in the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot, when the jackpot game state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot performance using the common jackpot performance pattern APB34. Also, in the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot, when the jackpot game state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot performance using the common jackpot performance pattern APB33. The jackpot performance by the jackpot performance pattern APB33 and the jackpot performance by the jackpot performance pattern APB34 may include performances executed corresponding to rounds that can be executed corresponding to the respective jackpot game states. Therefore, when a round is executed in the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot, the common jackpot performance by the jackpot performance pattern APB34 can be executed in the cases where the game state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and where the game state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, when a round is executed in the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot, the common jackpot performance by the jackpot performance pattern APB33 can be executed in the cases where the game state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and where the game state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, by executing the jackpot performance using a common jackpot performance pattern, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the jackpot performance will result in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

In the jackpot performance control example AKC13, the jackpot end performance pattern is set to a common pattern APC33 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, and to a common pattern APC34 corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14. Therefore, when the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot ends, the jackpot end performance can be executed by the common jackpot end performance pattern APC34 in the case where the state is controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, when the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot ends, the jackpot end performance can be executed by the common jackpot end performance pattern APC33 in the case where the state is controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, when the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot ends, it is possible to execute a jackpot end effect using a common jackpot end effect pattern APC34 in the case where the state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, when the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot ends, it is possible to execute a jackpot end effect using a common jackpot end effect pattern APB33 in the case where the state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, by executing a jackpot end effect using a common jackpot end effect pattern, it is difficult to recognize whether the state is a high-probability high base state or a low-probability high base state when the jackpot end effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest regarding the variable display.

Figure 17-31 shows a variable display control example AKC21 in which the special chart display result is based on "jackpot" when the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H] or 08 [H]. In the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in Figure 17-8, when the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H], the variable pattern type selection table is specified as table TB31 corresponding to jackpot types NA09, KA12, table TB32 corresponding to jackpot types NA10, KA13, table TB33 corresponding to jackpot types NA11, KA14, and table TB34 corresponding to jackpot type KA15. Also, in the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8, when the presentation state selection designation value is 08 [H], the variation pattern type selection table is designated as table TB35 corresponding to jackpot types NA09 and KA12, table TB36 corresponding to jackpot types NA10 and KA13, table TB37 corresponding to jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and table TB38 corresponding to jackpot type KA15.

Table TB31 shown in FIG. 17-11 (E) and table TB35 shown in FIG. 17-11 (I) can select only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2. Table TB32 shown in FIG. 17-11 (F) and table TB36 shown in FIG. 17-11 (J) can select only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3. Table TB33 shown in FIG. 17-11 (G) and table TB37 shown in FIG. 17-11 (K) can select only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4. Table TB34 shown in FIG. 17-11 (H) and table TB38 shown in FIG. 17-11 (L) can select only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-5. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2 shown in FIG. 17-15 (B), it can be determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 or PB3-2. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 shown in FIG. 17-15(C) and the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 shown in FIG. 17-15(D), it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB3-5 shown in FIG. 17-15(E), it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11.

In the variable display control example AKC21, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "10" for jackpot type KA15, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "07" for jackpot types NA11 and KA14, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "04" for jackpot types NA10 and KA13, and the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "02" for jackpot types NA09 and KA12. Among these, the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is KA15 corresponds to the first jackpot game state, the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is NA10, NA11, KA13, KA14 corresponds to the second jackpot game state with fewer rounds than the first jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is NA09, KA12 can correspond to the third jackpot game state with fewer rounds than the second jackpot game state. The jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 can all be determined in response to "Yes" where high base control is performed and the start port winning designated value "2" where the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed. In this way, during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is being performed, the jackpot game states that can be controlled based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol becoming a "jackpot" include a first jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot type KA15, which is a 10-round jackpot, a second jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA11, KA14, which are 7-round jackpots with fewer rounds than a 10-round jackpot, or jackpot types NA10, KA13, which are 4-round jackpots, and a third jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA09, KA12, which are 2-round jackpots with fewer rounds than a 7-round jackpot or 4-round jackpot.

The variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state are variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 that can be determined in response to the jackpot types NA10, NA11, KA13, and KA14. If the jackpot type is either NA10 or NA11, control is possible to a low-probability, high-base state as the second state based on the time-saving counter initial value being set to "10000" after the end of the second jackpot game state. In contrast, the variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state are variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 that can be determined in response to the jackpot types NA09 and KA12. Then, if the jackpot type is NA09, the time-saving counter initial value can be controlled to a low-probability high-base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000" after the end of the third jackpot game state. The variation pattern PB3-1 included in the variation pattern that can be determined corresponding to such a jackpot type NA09 has a special chart variation time of 2500 milliseconds, and has a shorter variable display period than the variation patterns PB3-3 to PB3-8 included in the variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and NA11. In other words, the variation patterns PB3-3 to PB3-8 included in the variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and NA11 have a longer variable display time than the variation pattern PB3-1 included in the variation pattern that can be determined corresponding to the jackpot type NA09. As a result, when the variable display period is a long variation pattern, the expectation of being controlled to the second jackpot game state in which the number of rounds is greater than the third jackpot game state is increased, and the game interest regarding the variable display can be improved.

Fluctuation pattern PB3-2, which is included in the fluctuation pattern that can be determined in response to jackpot type NA09, is also included in the fluctuation pattern that can be determined in response to jackpot types NA10 and NA11. In the case of jackpot type NA09, after the end of a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state, it is possible to control to a low-probability high base state as the second state. In the case of jackpot types NA10 and NA11, after the end of a 4-round jackpot or a 7-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state, it is possible to control to a low-probability high base state as the second state. In this way, a common fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation pattern PB3-2 can be determined in the case where the state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of a 4-round jackpot or a 7-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state, and the case where the state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state. This makes it difficult to tell whether the game will enter the second or third jackpot game state when a fluctuation pattern results in a specific variable display period, thereby increasing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

In response to the end of a jackpot game state based on a second special jackpot during a high base, the special period performance designation value is set to 0E [H] if the jackpot type is NA09-NA11 and the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000" and there is no V win, and the special period performance designation value is set to 0E [H] if the jackpot type is KA12-KA15 and the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70" and there is a V win, the special period performance designation value is set to 07 [H]. The high probability high base state where the time-saving counter initial value is "70" corresponds to the first state, and the low probability high base state where the time-saving counter initial value is "10000" corresponds to the second state. Data indicating the special period performance designation value is stored and memorized in the special period performance buffer. In the example of the setting AKB12 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 17-24, when there is no V win in the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, command data indicating command 9505 [H] as background designation after the jackpot is stored in a background designation command buffer or the like and can be sent. In the example of the setting AKB13 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 17-25, when there is a V win in the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, command data indicating command 9506 [H] as background designation after the jackpot is stored in a background designation command buffer or the like and can be sent. When command 9505 [H] is sent as a background designation command and when command 9506 [H] is sent, the background may be displayed using a common presentation image in response to the high base being in a time-saving state or a high-variable state in which high-base control is being performed.

As described above, data indicating a special period effect designation value that serves as counting information can be set in response to the end of a jackpot gaming state, and when controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state, 07 [H] is set as the special period effect designation value, and when controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state, 0E [H] is set as the special period effect designation value. Also, during the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state, and during the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state, a background display using a common effect image based on a background designation command is possible. In this way, by making it difficult to recognize whether the state is in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state based on the display of the effect image that serves as a common background image, it is possible to increase the interest in playing with the variable display.

In response to the end of the jackpot game state based on the second special jackpot during a high base, the presentation state selection designated value is set to 06 [H], which is a common value for jackpot types NA09-NA11 and KA12-KA15. After that, during the low-probability high base state based on jackpot types NA09-NA11, the presentation state selection designated value is updated to 08 [H], and during the high-probability high base state based on jackpot types KA12-KA15, the presentation state selection designated value is updated to 07 [H]. When the presentation state selection designated value is 06 [H], the special chart display result corresponds to a "miss," and reference table TS02 is specified in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (A). When the performance state selection designation value is 07 [H], the special chart display result corresponds to "miss", and the reference table TS03 is designated in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (A). When the performance state selection designation value is 08 [H], the special chart display result corresponds to "miss", and the reference table TS04 is designated in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (A). When the start gate winning designation value is "2", the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 17-6 (D) can designate either table TB22 or TB23 as the variation pattern type selection table corresponding to the second reserved memory number. When the start gate winning designation value is "2", the reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 17-6 (E) can designate either table TB24 or TB25 as the variation pattern type selection table corresponding to the second reserved memory number. In the case of table TB22 shown in FIG. 17-10(I) and table TB23 shown in FIG. 17-10(J), and in the case of table TB24 shown in FIG. 17-10(K) and table TB25 shown in FIG. 17-10(L), the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2 to CB1-4 and CB2-1 can all be determined. In particular, the fluctuation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1 can be determined regardless of whether any of tables TB22 to TB25 is specified.

As described above, when the number of variable displays is less than the first number of "70" during a high-probability, high base state corresponding to the first state and during a low-probability, high base state corresponding to the second state, it is possible to determine the variable pattern using table data of the variable pattern determination table, which serves as common determination data corresponding to, for example, the variable pattern types CB1-4, CB2-1, etc. In this way, since the variable pattern is determined using common determination data, it is possible to increase the commonality of the variable display and make it difficult to recognize whether the state is in a high-probability, high base state or a low-probability, high base state, thereby improving the interest in the variable display.

In the variable display control example AKC21, the average fluctuation time corresponding to each jackpot type can be obtained from the special chart fluctuation time and the determination ratio of the determinable pattern corresponding to each jackpot type. More specifically, the average fluctuation time corresponding to each jackpot type can be obtained by multiplying the special chart fluctuation time and the determination ratio for each determinable pattern and adding the value for the multiple determinable patterns corresponding to the jackpot type. For example, the average fluctuation time corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 and KA12 is 3900 milliseconds, the average fluctuation time corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13 is 16190 milliseconds, the average fluctuation time corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14 is 16740 milliseconds, and the average fluctuation time corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 is 20960 milliseconds. The fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state are the fluctuation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 that can be determined corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. The variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state are the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 that can be determined in response to the jackpot types NA10, NA11, KA13, and KA14. The variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state are the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 that can be determined in response to the jackpot types NA09 and KA12. In this way, the average variation time of 20960 milliseconds in the multiple variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state is set to be longer than the average variation times of 16740 milliseconds and 16190 milliseconds in the multiple variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state. In addition, the average change time in the multiple change patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state is set so that the variable display period is longer than the average change time of 3900 milliseconds in the multiple change patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state. This increases the expectation of being controlled to the second jackpot game state, which has more rounds than the third jackpot game state, when the variable display period is a long change pattern, and also increases the expectation of being controlled to the first jackpot game state, which has more rounds than the second jackpot game state, thereby improving the game interest regarding the variable display.

Figure 17-32 shows a variable display control example AKC22 for the variable display that triggers control to the jackpot gaming state when the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H] or 08 [H]. In the variable display control example AKC22, the average fluctuation time for the entire variation pattern that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the jackpot gaming state is shown. The average fluctuation time for such an entire variation pattern can be obtained from the average fluctuation time corresponding to each jackpot type obtained in the variable display control example AKC21 and the high base determination rate of each jackpot type. More specifically, the average fluctuation time for the entire variation pattern can be obtained by adding the value obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time for each jackpot type and the determination rate for all jackpot types. As a result, in the variable display control example AKC22, the average fluctuation time for the entire variation pattern is 12650 milliseconds. In this case, the average fluctuation time of 20960 milliseconds in the multiple fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state is set to be longer than the average fluctuation time of 12650 milliseconds for the whole. Also, the average fluctuation times of 16740 milliseconds and 16190 milliseconds in the multiple fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state are set to be longer than the average fluctuation time of 12650 milliseconds for the whole. On the other hand, the average fluctuation time of 3900 milliseconds in the multiple fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state is set to be shorter than the average fluctuation time of 12650 milliseconds for the whole. This increases the expectation that the game will be controlled to the second jackpot game state, which has a greater number of rounds than the third jackpot game state, when the variable display period is a long fluctuation pattern, and also increases the expectation that the game will be controlled to the first jackpot game state, which has a greater number of rounds than the second jackpot game state, thereby improving game interest regarding the variable display.

Figure 17-33 (A) shows a variable display control example AKC31 corresponding to the presentation state selection designated values 07 [H], 08 [H], 0C [H], and 0D [H]. When the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H], the game state is a high probability high base state, and the special chart display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, corresponds to "miss", and the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected. When the presentation state selection designated value is 08 [H], the game state is a low probability high base state, and the special chart display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, corresponds to "miss", and the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected. And the variation pattern type CB2-1 includes the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 as determinable variation patterns.

In the example of a miss variation pattern shown in Figure 17-4, variation pattern PB2-2 executes the reach performance of Super Reach SPE, which becomes the second variable display performance during the variable display, and the special chart variation time is 16,500 milliseconds. In contrast, variation pattern PB2-3 executes the reach performance of Super Reach SPF, which becomes the first variable display performance during the variable display, and the special chart variation time is 35,500 milliseconds. Also, in the example of a jackpot variation pattern shown in Figure 17-5, the reach performance of Super Reach SPE, which becomes the second variable display performance, is executed during the variable display of variation pattern PB3-3, and the reach performance of Super Reach SPF, which becomes the first variable display performance, is executed during the variable display of variation pattern PB3-4. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 shown in FIG. 17-14(J) or the fluctuation pattern type CB2-2 shown in FIG. 17-14(K), the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB2-3 is set to be lower than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB2-2. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern CB4-4 shown in FIG. 17-16(D) or the fluctuation pattern type CB4-5 shown in FIG. 17-16(E), the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB3-4 is set to be higher than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB3-3. With such a setting, the reach performance of the Super Reach SPF, which is the first variable display performance, is controlled to a jackpot game state at a high rate, and the reach performance of the Super Reach SPE, which is the second variable display performance, is controlled to a jackpot game state at a lower rate than the reach performance of the Super Reach SPF.

In the variable display control example AKC31, when the presentation state selection designation value is 0C [H], the game state is a high probability high base state, and the special chart display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, corresponds to "miss", and the variable pattern type CB1-8 can be selected, and when the special chart display result corresponds to "jackpot", the variable pattern type CB4-1, CB4-2 can be selected. Also, when the presentation state selection designation value is 0D [H], the game state is a low probability high base state, and the special chart display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, corresponds to "miss", and the variable pattern type CB1-9 can be selected, and when the special chart display result corresponds to "jackpot", the variable pattern type CB4-1, CB4-2 can be selected. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern type is CB1-8, it can be determined to be fluctuation pattern PB1-8, when the fluctuation pattern type is CB1-9, it can be determined to be fluctuation pattern PB1-9, when the fluctuation pattern type is CB4-1, it can be determined to be fluctuation pattern PB3-2, and when the fluctuation pattern type is CB4-2, it can be determined to be fluctuation pattern PB3-9.

The special chart fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 corresponding to the second special pattern is 16,500 milliseconds, and is set so that the variable display period is shorter than the special chart fluctuation time of 35,500 milliseconds of the fluctuation pattern PB2-3 corresponding to the first special pattern. Also, in response to the fact that the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state is the first number of times "70", it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern PB1-8 when the special chart display result is a "miss", and it is possible to determine the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 when the special chart display result is a "jackpot". The special chart fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB1-8 is 12,500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is 4,500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is 11,500 milliseconds, so all of these are set to have a shorter variable display period than the special chart fluctuation time of 16,500 milliseconds of the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 corresponding to the second special pattern. This allows the variable display by the fluctuation pattern capable of executing the result display that is a value notification to be appropriately executed, thereby increasing the interest in the variable display.

Corresponding to the fact that the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state is the first number of times, 70, the variation patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" are the first pattern, and the variation pattern PB1-8 that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "miss" is the second pattern. The special chart variation time of variation pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds, the special chart variation time of variation pattern PB3-9 is 11500 milliseconds, and the special chart variation time of variation pattern PB1-8 is 12500 milliseconds. All of these variation patterns are set so that the variable display period is shorter than the special chart variation time of 16500 milliseconds of variation pattern PB2-2 that executes the reach performance of the Super Reach SPE, which is the second variable display performance. This allows the player to appropriately execute the variable display according to the variation pattern PB1-8, which executes the result display that notifies the player of value, thereby increasing the player's interest in the variable display.

In the variable display control example AKC31, the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 can be determined when the fluctuation pattern type is CB4-1. The fluctuation pattern type CB4-1 can be selected when the table TB40 shown in FIG. 17-12 (A) is specified. The table TB40 can be specified in accordance with the jackpot type NA09-NA11 and the jackpot type KA12-KA14 when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C [H] or 0D [H], according to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8. However, when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C [H] or 0D [H], the jackpot types NA08 and KA11 are not determined. In contrast, the fluctuation pattern PB3-9 can be determined when the fluctuation pattern type is CB4-2. The fluctuation pattern type CB4-2 can be selected when the table TB41 shown in FIG. 17-12 (B) is specified. Table TB41 can be specified in accordance with jackpot type KA15 when the presentation state selection designation value is 0C [H] or 0D [H] according to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 17-8. Therefore, when the variation pattern PB3-9 is selected, it can be controlled to a 10-round jackpot corresponding to jackpot type KA15, and when the variation pattern PB3-2 is selected, it can be controlled to a 2-round jackpot, 4-round jackpot, or 7-round jackpot corresponding to jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA14.

In accordance with the fact that the number of times the variable display is executed during special states such as a high probability high base state and a low probability low base state is the first number of times, which is "70," among the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "jackpot," fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is the third pattern, and fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is the fourth pattern. These third and fourth patterns are included in the first pattern. Furthermore, fluctuation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "miss" are the second pattern. The special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is 4,500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is 11,500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB1-8 is 12,500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB1-9 is 29,900 milliseconds. Therefore, the variable display period of the third pattern, variable pattern PB3-2, and the fourth pattern, variable pattern PB3-9, is set to be shorter than the variable display periods of the second pattern, variable patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9. This increases the sense of surprise when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" in the variable display where the result display, which is a value notification, is executed, and increases the interest in the variable display.

In response to the first number of executions of the variable display during a special state such as a high-probability high base state or a low-probability low base state being "70", the variable patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" are special variable display patterns. In response to the first number of executions of the variable display during a special state such as a high-probability high base state or a low-probability low base state being less than "70", the jackpot game state that can be controlled when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" includes a first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 which is a 10-round jackpot, and a second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA11, KA14 which is a 7-round jackpot with fewer rounds than a 10-round jackpot, or the jackpot type NA10, KA13 which is a 4-round jackpot, or the jackpot type NA09, KA12 which is a 2-round jackpot. The variable patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state are the variable patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 that can be determined in response to the jackpot type KA15. These variable patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 are included in multiple specific variable display patterns.

In the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. 17-31, the average fluctuation time in the multiple variable patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state is 20960 milliseconds. In contrast, the special chart fluctuation time of the variable pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time of the variable pattern PB3-9 is 11500 milliseconds, and both are set so that the variable display period is shorter than 20960 milliseconds. In this way, the variable display patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 that become the special variable display patterns are set so that the variable display period is shorter than the average fluctuation time in the variable display patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 that become the multiple specific variable display patterns. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the variable display in which the result display that is a value notification is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

In the variable display control example AKC31, the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state corresponds to the first number of times of "70", and when the special chart display result is a "miss", the variation pattern types CB1-8 and CB1-9 can be selected, and when the special chart display result is a "jackpot", the variation pattern types CB4-1 and CB4-2 can be selected. In the case of the variation pattern type CB1-8, only the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined, in the case of the variation pattern type CB1-9, only the variation pattern PB1-9 can be determined, in the case of the variation pattern type CB4-1, only the variation pattern PB3-2 can be determined, and in the case of the variation pattern type CB4-2, only the variation pattern PB3-9 can be determined. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table in the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 correspond to the specific determination data. In this way, when a result display that is a value notification is executed in response to the 70th variable display during a special state, the total number of variable patterns that can be determined using the specific determination data is "4." In contrast, when the number of times that the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state is less than the first number of "70," the variable pattern type CB2-1 can be selected when the special chart display result is "miss."

In the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. 17-31, in response to the fact that the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state is less than the first number of times "70", when the special chart display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern types CB3-2 to CB3-5 can be selected. In the case of variation pattern type CB2-1, either variation pattern PB2-2 or PB2-3 can be determined. In the case of variation pattern types CB3-2 to CB3-5, any one of variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-11 can be determined overall. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table in the variation pattern types CB2-1 and CB3-2 to CB3-5 corresponds to the normal determination data. In this way, in response to the variable display before the 70th time during the special state, the total number of variation patterns that can be determined using the normal determination data is "13". Therefore, the total number of variable patterns that can be determined when a result display that notifies value is executed is smaller than the total number of variable patterns that can be determined during the previous special state. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity required to execute a variable display that executes a result display that notifies value, while improving gameplay interest in the variable display.

The high-probability high base state, which corresponds to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 and can be controlled until 70 variable displays corresponding to the first number of times are executed when the time-saving counter initial value is "70" after the jackpot game state ends, corresponds to the first state, and the low-probability high base state, which corresponds to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and can be controlled until 10,000 variable displays corresponding to the second number of times "10,000" which is greater than the first number after the jackpot game state ends, corresponds to the second state. The high-probability high base state corresponding to the first state has a higher probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state, and variable displays are more likely to be executed compared to the normal state due to high base control. The low-probability high base state corresponding to the second state has the same probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state as the normal state, and variable displays are more likely to be executed compared to the normal state due to high base control. During the low probability high base state, which is the second state, the presentation state selection designated value corresponds to 08 [H] until the count value of the time-saving counter reaches "9931", and if the special chart display result is "miss", the reference table TS04 is specified by the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (A). The table data constituting the reference table TS04 corresponds to the first determination data. Also, when the count value of the time-saving counter reaches "9930", the presentation state selection designated value corresponds to 0E [H], and if the special chart display result is "miss", the reference table TS02 is specified by the miss reference table AKA01. The table data constituting the reference table TS02 corresponds to the second determination data.

Reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 17-6(E) allows any one of tables TB10, TB24, TB25 to be designated as the variation pattern type determination table in accordance with the start port winning designated value and the first and second reserved memory counts. Reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 17-6(C) allows any one of tables TB10, TB20, TB21 to be designated as the variation pattern type determination table in accordance with the start port winning designated value and the first and second reserved memory counts. Table TB20 shown in FIG. 17-10(G) allows only variation pattern type CB1-2 to be selected, and table TB21 shown in FIG. 17-10(H) allows only variation pattern type CB1-3 to be selected. In contrast, the table TB24 shown in Fig. 17-10(K) allows the selection of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1 in addition to the fluctuation pattern type CB1-2, and the table TB25 shown in Fig. 17-10(L) allows the selection of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1 in addition to the fluctuation pattern type CB1-3. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-2 shown in Fig. 17-14(B), only the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 can be determined, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-3 shown in Fig. 17-14(C), only the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 can be determined. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-4 shown in FIG. 17-14 (D), the fluctuation patterns PB1-4 and PB1-5 can be determined, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 shown in FIG. 17-14 (J), one of the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3 can be determined.

In the configuration example of the miss fluctuation pattern shown in Figure 17-4, the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB1-2 is 3500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB1-3 is 500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB1-4 is 500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB1-5 is 2000 milliseconds. Also, the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB2-1 is 3500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB2-2 is 16500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB2-3 is 35500 milliseconds. In this way, when the reference table TS04 corresponding to the first determination data is used, the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected, whereas when the reference table TS02 corresponding to the second determination data is used, the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 is not selected. Therefore, the variable display pattern that can be determined using the reference table TS02 corresponding to the second determination data is set to have a shorter average variable display period than the variable display pattern that can be determined using the reference table TS04 corresponding to the first determination data. As a result, the variable display during the low probability high base corresponding to the second state can be performed quickly after exceeding the first number of times, "70", by appropriately performing the variable display, thereby improving the game interest regarding the variable display.

When the reference table TS04 corresponding to the first determination data is used, the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected, and the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3 that can be determined in the case of the variation pattern type CB2-1 are variation patterns that can execute a reach effect after the variable display becomes a reach state. In particular, the variation pattern PB2-2 can execute the reach effect of the super reach SPE, and the variation pattern PB2-3 can execute the reach effect of the super reach SPF. The reach effects of the super reach SPE and SPF correspond to specific effects, and the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 correspond to the effect variable display pattern. When the reference table TS02 corresponding to the second determination data is used, the variation pattern type CB2-1 is not selected, so the variation patterns that can be determined using the reference table TS02 do not include the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 that correspond to the effect variable display pattern. This allows the variable display to be appropriately executed during the low probability high base corresponding to the second state, and increases the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

Figure 17-33 (B) shows a variable display control example AKC32 based on another viewpoint corresponding to the presentation state selection designated values 07 [H], 08 [H], 0C [H], 0D [H]. As with the variable display control example AKC21 shown in Figure 17-31, if the presentation state selection designated value corresponds to 07 [H], 08 [H], and the special chart display result is "jackpot" with jackpot types NA09, KA12, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "02", and only the variation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. In the case of the variation pattern type CB3-2, it is possible to determine either the variation pattern PB3-1 or PB3-2. The two-round jackpot with the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened of "02" corresponds to the first type advantageous state, and the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 correspond to the first type variable display pattern. Also, if the presentation state selection designation value corresponds to 07 [H] or 08 [H], and the special chart display result is "jackpot" with jackpot type NA10 or KA13, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is set to "04", and only the variation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. In the case of variation pattern type CB3-3, it is possible to determine one of the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. A 4-round jackpot with the maximum number of times the large prize opening is "04" corresponds to the second type advantageous state, and variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 correspond to the second type variable display pattern.

In the variable display control example AKC31 shown in FIG. 17-33(A), when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C[H] and the special chart display result is a "miss", only the variation pattern type CB1-8 can be selected, and when the presentation state selection designated value is 0D[H] and the special chart display result is a "miss", only the variation pattern type CB1-9 can be selected. Also, when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C[H] or 0D[H] and the special chart display result is a "jackpot", variation pattern types CB4-1 and CB4-2 can be selected. In this way, when a result display that is a value notification is executed in response to the 70th variable display during the special state, it is possible to determine a variation pattern that corresponds to the selection result of the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2. The table data that constitutes the fluctuation pattern determination table for fluctuation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 corresponds to specific determination data.

In the variable display control example AKC31 shown in FIG. 17-33(A), if the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H] or 08 [H] and the special chart display result is "miss", only the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected. Also, in the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. 17-31, if the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H] or 08 [H] and the special chart display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern type CB3-2 to CB3-5 corresponding to the jackpot type can be selected. In this way, it is possible to determine a variation pattern corresponding to the selection result of the variation pattern type CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 in response to the variable display before the 70th time during the special state. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table in the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 corresponds to the normal determination data, and the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 correspond to the notification variable display pattern.

The variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 corresponding to the first type variable display pattern and the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 corresponding to the second type variable display pattern each include the variation pattern PB3-2 corresponding to the type common variable display pattern. The special chart variation time of the variation pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds. In addition, among the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 corresponding to the notification variable display pattern, the special chart variation time of the variation pattern PB1-8 is 12500 milliseconds, and the special chart variation time of the variation pattern PB1-9 is 29900 milliseconds. Therefore, the variation pattern PB3-2 corresponding to the type common variable pattern is set so that the variable display period is shorter than the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 corresponding to the notification variable display pattern. By using the variation pattern PB3-2 corresponding to such a type common variable pattern, the increase in the variation pattern corresponding to the special chart display result "jackpot" is suppressed, so that the increase in the data capacity can be prevented. In addition, the variable display period is shortened in the case of the variable pattern PB3-2, which corresponds to the type-common variable pattern, so that the sense of surprise when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" in the variable display is increased, and the interest in the game regarding the variable display can be improved.

In step AKS502 of the effect pattern change start processing shown in FIG. 17-26, if the number of executions of the variable display corresponding to the probability change state or the time-saving state reaches 70 times and the variable display is the variable pattern PB3-2, it may be determined that the variable pattern is for result display. In this case, the result display control setting is performed by step AKS503. Based on this setting, in step AKS525 of the effect pattern change processing shown in FIG. 17-27, control is performed to execute the result display, and the result display as a value notification that notifies the player of the result of the value acquired can be executed. The variable pattern PB3-2 can be determined in correspondence with the jackpot types NA09, KA12 and the jackpot types NA10, KA13 regardless of whether the effect state selection designated value is 0C[H] or 0D[H]. Such a variable pattern corresponds to a common variable display pattern. In the case of the jackpot type NA09, after the 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state is completed, it can be controlled to the low-probability high base state as the second state. In the case of the jackpot type NA10, after the 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state is completed, it can be controlled to the low-probability high base state as the second state. Therefore, when the variation pattern PB3-2 is determined in response to the execution number of the variable display during the low-probability high base state or the high-probability high base state being the first number of times of "70", a result display that is a value notification is executed during the variable display, and after the jackpot game state is completed, whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot, it is possible to provide a case where it is controlled to the low-probability high base state corresponding to the second state. Since it is possible to determine a common variation pattern such as the variation pattern PB3-2, it is difficult to recognize whether the game state is the second jackpot game state or the third jackpot game state in the case of the variable display in which the result display that is a value notification is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest regarding the variable display.

Figure 17-34 shows a presentation state control example AKC41 based on a different perspective corresponding to the second special chart jackpot during a high base. When the second special chart jackpot during a high base is of jackpot type KA12 to KA15, the jackpot type is included in "probable change", so a V win is more likely to occur. On the other hand, when the jackpot game state ends without a V win occurring, the presentation state is controlled differently from when a V win occurs. In the jackpot end setting example AKB13 shown in Figure 17-25, if there is no V win of jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the special period presentation designation value is set to 08 [H]. In this way, in the case where there is no V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the time-saving counter initial value "70" corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 and the presentation state selection designated value 06 [H] are set in the jackpot end setting AKB11 shown in FIG. 17-23. However, since there is no V win, the probability variable counter initial value is set to "0", and the game is controlled to a low probability high base state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the example of the control of the performance state AKC41, when the second special chart jackpot during the high base is of the jackpot type KA12 to KA15, the special performance period designation value is set to 08 [H] in response to the absence of a V winning, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70", and the performance state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the time-saving counter count value is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period performance update setting is performed. In the special period performance setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 17-19, when the special performance period designation value is 08 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "66", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 08 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "1", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H], and when the time-saving counter count value becomes "0", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized. In contrast, if the second special chart jackpot during the high base is of jackpot type KA12 to KA15, and there is a V win, the count value of the time-saving counter can be updated to the corresponding presentation state selection designated value, similar to the presentation state control example AKC02 shown in Figure 17-29.

In this way, if the special performance period designation value is set to 08 [H] in response to no V win based on the fact that the second special chart jackpot during the high base was of jackpot type KA12-KA15, the performance state selection designation value will be 08 [H] during the period when the time-saving counter count value is from "66" to "1". In contrast, if the special performance period designation value is set to 07 [H] in response to V win based on the fact that the second special chart jackpot during the high base was of jackpot type KA12-KA15, the performance state selection designation value will be 07 [H] during the period when the time-saving counter count value is from "66" to "1". On the other hand, when the time-saving counter count value becomes "1", the performance state selection designation value will be updated to 0C [H] regardless of whether or not a V win has occurred.

In the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (A), when the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H], reference table TS03 is designated, and when the presentation state selection designated value is 08 [H], reference table TS04 is designated. Also, when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C [H], reference table TS08 is designated. The table data constituting reference table TS03 corresponds to the first special determination data, the table data constituting reference table TS04 corresponds to the second special determination data, and the table data constituting reference table TS08 corresponds to the third special determination data. Thus, in a low probability high base state that can be controlled when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting reference table TS04 in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than the first number of times, "70". In contrast, in a high-probability high base state that can be controlled when there is a V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the variation pattern can be determined using table data constituting the reference table TS03 in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than "70" as the first number. In addition, in a case where the number of times the variable display is executed in a low-probability high base state is "70" as the first number, and in a case where the number of times the variable display is executed in a high-probability high base state is "70" as the first number, the variation pattern can be determined using table data constituting the reference table TS08 in response to the case where the number of times the variable display is executed is "70" as the first number during a low-probability high base state or a high-probability high base state that is a special state, the variation pattern can be determined using the reference table TS08 corresponding to the third special determination data, thereby preventing an increase in data capacity. Furthermore, if the number of times the variable display has been performed is less than the first number of times, which is "70," different determination data can be used to determine the variation pattern, allowing the variable display to be appropriately performed up to the first number of times, thereby increasing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

Figure 17-35 shows a presentation state control example AKC42 based on a different perspective corresponding to the second special chart jackpot during a high base. When the second special chart jackpot during a high base is of jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the jackpot type is included in "normal", making it difficult for a V win to occur. On the other hand, when a V win occurs and the jackpot game state ends, the presentation state is controlled to be different from when a V win does not occur. In the jackpot end setting example AKB12 shown in Figure 17-24, if there is a V win of jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the special period presentation designation value is set to 0D [H]. In this way, when there is a V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the time-saving counter initial value "10000" corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the presentation state selection designated value 06 [H] are set in the jackpot end setting AKB11 shown in FIG. 17-23. Furthermore, since there is a V win, the probability variable counter initial value is set to "70", and the game is controlled to a high probability high base state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the example of the control of the presentation state AKC42, when the second special chart jackpot during the high base is of the jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the special presentation period designation value is set to 0D [H] in response to the presence of a V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000", and the presentation state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the count value of the time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period presentation update setting is performed. In the special period effect setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 17-19, when the special effect period designation value is 0D [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "9996", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "9931", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0D [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "9930", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0E [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "0", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized. On the other hand, when the high base second special chart jackpot is a jackpot type NA09 to NA11, if there is no V winning, it can be updated to the effect state selection designation value corresponding to the time-saving counter count value, as in the example of the effect state control AKC02 shown in FIG. 17-29.

In this way, if the special period performance designation value is set to 0D [H] in response to a V win based on the fact that the second special chart jackpot during the high base was a jackpot type NA09-NA11, the performance state selection designation value will be 07 [H] during the period from "9996" to "9931" when the time-saving counter count value is "9996" to "9931" when the special period performance designation value is set to 0E [H] in response to no V win based on the fact that the second special chart jackpot during the high base was a jackpot type NA09-NA11, the performance state selection designation value will be 08 [H] during the period from "9996" to "9931". On the other hand, when the time-saving counter count value becomes "9931", the performance state selection designation value will be updated to 0D [H] regardless of whether or not a V win has occurred. Furthermore, when the time-saving counter reaches 9930, the presentation state selection designation value is updated to 0E [H] regardless of whether or not a V win occurs.

In the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 17-6 (A), reference table TS03 is specified when the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H], and reference table TS04 is specified when the presentation state selection designated value is 08 [H]. Furthermore, reference table TS09 is specified when the presentation state selection designated value is 0D [H], and reference table TS02 is specified when the presentation state selection designated value is 0E [H]. The table data constituting reference table TS03 corresponds to the first special decision data, the table data constituting reference table TS04 corresponds to the second special decision data, the table data constituting reference table TS09 corresponds to the fourth special decision data, and the table data constituting reference table TS02 corresponds to the common decision data. Thus, in the high-probability high base state that can be controlled when there is a V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting the reference table TS03 in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than "70" as the first number. On the other hand, in the low-probability high base state that can be controlled when there is no V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting the reference table TS04 in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than "70" as the first number. Then, in response to the case where the number of times the variable display is executed in the low-probability high base state is "70" as the first number and the case where the number of times the variable display is executed in the high-probability high base state is "70" as the first number, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting the reference table TS09. Thereafter, in response to the case where the number of times the variable display is executed in the low-probability high base state exceeds "70" as the first number, and the case where the number of times the variable display is executed in the high-probability high base state exceeds "70" as the first number, a variation pattern can be determined using table data constituting the reference table TS02. Therefore, in the case where the number of times the variable display is executed is "70" as the first number or exceeds "70" in the low-probability high base state or the high-probability high base state that is a special state, the variation pattern is determined using the reference table TS09 corresponding to the fourth special determination data or the reference table TS02 corresponding to the common determination data, thereby preventing an increase in data capacity. In addition, in the case where the number of times the variable display is executed is less than "70" as the first number, the variation pattern is determined using different determination data, and the variable display up to the first number can be appropriately executed, thereby improving the interest in the variable display.

Figure 17-36 shows an example of the performance when a result display or a status notification performance is executed. This performance execution example includes a case where the time-saving counter is controlled to a high-probability, high base state in which the initial value is "70" in response to the end of a jackpot game state, and a case where the time-saving counter is controlled to a low-probability, high base state in which the initial value is "10,000". The high-probability, high base state here corresponds to the first state, and the low-probability, high base state corresponds to the second state.

Figure 17-36 (A) shows a performance execution example AK101 during a high-probability high base state or a low-probability high base state in which high base control is being performed, during a period in which the number of times the variable display is executed is less than 70 times as the first number. In performance execution example AK101, a common performance image is used as the background image for the high-probability high base state corresponding to the first state, and the low-probability high base state corresponding to the second state, and a background display is performed as a high base background by displaying it on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 17-36 (B) shows a performance example AK102 in which the number of times the variable display is executed during a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state reaches 70 times as the first number. At this time, if the high probability high base state corresponds to the first state, the variation pattern PB1-8 is determined, and if the low probability high base state corresponds to the second state, the variation pattern PB1-9 is determined. In step AKS502 of the performance pattern variation start processing shown in Figure 17-26, in both cases of the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9, it is determined that the variation pattern is for result display, and the result display control setting is performed by step AKS503. Based on this setting, in the performance execution example AK102, a result display is executed that serves as a value notification that notifies the player of the results of the value acquired by the player, such as the total number of winning balls acquired by the player and the number of so-called consecutive wins.

Figure 17-36 (C) shows an example of performance execution AK103 after the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state ends. In the special period performance setting table AKT01 shown in Figure 17-19, when the count value of the time-saving counter matches the time-saving counter judgment value "0", command 9500 [H] is set to be sendable as a background designation command. Based on receiving this background designation command, the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12 displays the background as the normal background in the normal state. Also, in the special pattern change processing shown in Figure 17-18, when the count value of the probability change counter is judged to be "0" in step AKS127, the probability change control in the probability change state ends by clearing the probability change flag in step AKS128. Furthermore, if it is determined in step AKS131 that the count value of the time-saving counter is "0," the high base control in the time-saving state is terminated by clearing the time-saving flag in step AKS132, etc.

Figures 17-36 (D) to (F) show performance execution examples AK104 to AK106 when the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state continues. Of these, performance execution example AK104 shown in Figure 17-36 (D) and performance execution example AK105 shown in Figure 17-36 (E) are included in the status notification performance that can be executed in response to the fluctuation pattern PB1-9. In step AKS504 of the performance pattern fluctuation start processing shown in Figure 17-26, in the case of fluctuation pattern PB1-9, it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern for status notification performance, and status notification performance control setting is performed by step AKS505. Based on this setting, in performance execution example AK104, button display AKE01 is performed by displaying a performance image showing push button 31B as a specific image on the screen of image display device 5. The presentation image corresponding to button display AKE01 may be hidden while the result display of presentation execution example AK103 is performed in the case of a high probability, high base state corresponding to the first state. In contrast, the presentation image corresponding to button display AKE01 may be displayed in conjunction with the execution of the result display of presentation execution example AK103 in the case of a low probability, high base state corresponding to the second state. By providing appropriate notifications using button display AKE01 in this way, it is possible to increase the interest in playing with the variable display.

After that, it may be possible to execute different status notification effects depending on whether or not a player action, such as a press operation on the push button 31B, has been detected. In the effect execution example AK105, when a press operation on the push button 31B is detected, a notification display is performed by displaying a display image on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the game is in a low probability high base state corresponding to the second state. On the other hand, when a press operation on the push button 31B is not detected, the status notification effect may end with the end of the variable display without executing a notification display.

In the performance execution example AK106, when the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state occurs, the number of times the variable display is executed is 71 times or more, exceeding the first number of times of 70. In this case, a background display is performed as a high base medium background, similar to the performance execution example AK101. This background display makes it easier to recognize that the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state is continuing, and can increase the interest in the variable display.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 23AK)
The gaming machine performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and includes special state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, variable display pattern determination means capable of determining a variable display pattern, and notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notifications including a value notification for notifying the result of a value acquired by a player. The special state includes a first state in which the game machine can be controlled until a first number of variable displays are executed after the advantageous state ends, and a second state in which the game machine can be controlled until a second number of variable displays, which is greater than the first number, are executed after the advantageous state ends. The variable display pattern determination means can determine a first variable display pattern in response to the execution number of the variable display in the first state being a first number of times, and can determine a second variable display pattern in response to the execution number of the variable display in the second state being a first number of times, and the notification means executes a value notification during the variable display by the first variable display pattern, executes a value notification and a notification that it is in the second state during the variable display by the second variable display pattern, and the second variable display pattern has a longer variable display period than the first variable display pattern. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The special state may be, for example, a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state. The special state control means may be, for example, a CPU 103 of a gaming control microcomputer 100 that executes step AKS166. The variable display pattern determination means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the variable pattern setting process of step AKS110. The value notification may be, for example, the performance execution example AK102. The notification means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS525 and AKS527. The first number of times may be, for example, "70". The first state may be, for example, a high probability high base state based on any of the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. The second number of times may be, for example, "10000". The second state may be, for example, a low probability high base state based on any of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11. The first variable display pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB1-8. The second variable display pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB1-9. The notification of the second state may be, for example, the performance execution example AK102, AK104, AK105, etc. The variable display period may be, for example, the variable display control example AKC11.
According to such a configuration, the variable display period and the notification contents can be made different between the first variable display pattern and the second variable display pattern, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game relating to the variable display.

[1] A variable display of identification information is provided, and an advantageous state control means is provided that can control the display result of the variable display to an advantageous state when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, and when the display result of the variable display is controlled to a special state, the display result of the variable display may be controlled to the second state based on the fact that the second identification information of the identification information has become a specific result, and when the display result of the variable display is not controlled to the special state, the display result of the variable display may not be controlled to the second state based on the fact that the second identification information of the identification information has become a specific result, and when the display result of the variable display is controlled to the special state and when the display result of the variable display is not controlled to the special state, the display result of the variable display may not be controlled to the second state based on the fact that the first identification information of the identification information has become a specific result. Here, the advantageous state control means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a process before the opening of a large prize opening, a process during the opening of a large prize opening, a process after the opening of a large prize opening, and a process to end a large prize. When the display result of the variable display is controlled to the second state, the display result of the variable display may be controlled to the second state based on the fact that the first ... the like.
In such a configuration, the interest in the game regarding the variable display can be increased by controlling the variable display according to whether it is controlled to a special state or not, or according to a specific result.

[2] A variable means capable of changing between a first variable state in which the game medium can enter and a second variable state in which the game medium cannot enter, an advantageous state control means for performing variable display of identification information and controlling the state to an advantageous state when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, and a variable control means capable of executing a predetermined number of unit games that change the variable means to the first variable state in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state that can be controlled based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific result by the second identification information of the identification information when controlled to a special state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having a smaller number of unit games than the first advantageous state, and after the end of the first advantageous state, there is a case where the device is controlled to the first state and a case where the device is not controlled to the second state, and after the end of the second advantageous state, there may be a case where the device is controlled to the first state and a case where the device is controlled to the second state. Here, the first variable state may be, for example, an open state. The second variable state may be, for example, a closed state. The variable means may be, for example, a special variable winning ball device 50. The advantageous state control means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a pre-opening process of the large prize opening, a process during the opening of the large prize opening, a process after the opening of the large prize opening, and a jackpot end process. The unit game may be, for example, a round in a jackpot game state. The first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and KA12 to KA14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage when the second advantageous state occurs in which the number of unit games is small, and to increase the player's interest in the variable display.

[3] The advantageous state that can be controlled based on the display result of the variable display being a specific result by the second identification information among the identification information when controlled to a special state includes a first advantageous state, a second advantageous state having a smaller number of unit games than the first advantageous state, and a third advantageous state having a smaller number of unit games than the second advantageous state, and after the end of the first advantageous state, there is a case where it is controlled to the first state, and there is no case where it is controlled to the second state, and after the end of the second advantageous state and the end of the third advantageous state, there is a case where it is controlled to the first state and a case where it is controlled to the second state, and after the end of the third advantageous state, it may be possible to control to the second state at a higher rate than after the end of the second advantageous state. Here, the first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14. The third advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13. The case where the ball is controlled to the second state may be, for example, when the jackpot game state corresponding to any of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 ends. The case where the ball can be controlled to the second state at a high rate may be, for example, when the jackpot control example AKC12 is used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage when the third advantageous state occurs in which the number of unit plays is small, and to increase the player's interest in the variable display.

[4] The variable display pattern determination means may determine a variable display pattern using common first data in a case where the variable display is controlled to the first state after the end of the second advantageous state and a case where the variable display is controlled to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state, corresponding to the variable display that is a trigger for control to the second advantageous state, and may determine a variable display pattern using common second data in a case where the variable display is controlled to the first state after the end of the third advantageous state and a case where the variable display is controlled to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state, corresponding to the variable display that is a trigger for control to the third advantageous state. Here, the common first data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table specified when the variable pattern type CB3-4 is selected. The common second data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table specified when the variable pattern type CB3-3 is selected.
In such a configuration, the commonality of the variable display is increased, making it difficult to recognize whether the state is the first state or the second state, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[5] The variable display pattern that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to the second advantageous state includes a first specific pattern in the case where the display is controlled to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state, and the variable display pattern that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to the third advantageous state includes a second specific pattern in the case where the display is controlled to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state, and the first specific pattern may have a longer variable display period than the second specific pattern. Here, the first specific pattern may be, for example, any of the variable patterns PB3-3 to PB3-8. The second specific pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB3-1. The longer variable display period may be, for example, in the case of the variable display control example AKC21.
In such a configuration, when the variable display period is long, the expectation that the number of unit games will be controlled to the second advantageous state in which the number of unit games is greater than the third advantageous state is increased, thereby improving the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[6] The variable display pattern determination means may determine a common variable display pattern for a case in which the value notification can be executed in response to the execution number of the variable display being the first number of times during the special state, between a case in which the control is made to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state and a case in which the control is made to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state. Here, the common variable display pattern may be, for example, the fluctuation pattern PB3-2.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the second advantageous state or the third advantageous state will result when the first number of variable displays are executed, it is possible to increase interest in the variable displays.

[7] A start-time performance execution means capable of executing a start-time performance corresponding to the start of an advantageous state is provided, and the start-time performance execution means may execute a common start-time performance when the first state is controlled after the end of the second advantageous state and when the second state is controlled after the end of the second advantageous state, and may execute a common start-time performance when the first state is controlled after the end of the third advantageous state and when the second state is controlled after the end of the third advantageous state. For example, it may be the case that the jackpot start performance pattern in the jackpot performance control example AKC13 is common in response to the maximum number of times the jackpot opening port is opened.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the first state or the second state will occur when the start-up performance is executed, it is possible to increase the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[8] A predetermined performance execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined performance corresponding to a unit game that can be executed a predetermined number of times in an advantageous state, and the predetermined performance execution means can execute a common predetermined performance when the first state is controlled after the end of the second advantageous state and when the second state is controlled after the end of the second advantageous state, and can execute a common predetermined performance when the first state is controlled after the end of the third advantageous state and when the second state is controlled after the end of the third advantageous state. For example, it may be the case that the performance pattern during a jackpot in the performance control example AKC13 becomes common corresponding to the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the first state or the second state will be achieved when a predetermined presentation is executed, it is possible to increase the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[9] The game machine may be provided with an end-time performance execution means capable of executing an end-time performance in response to the end of an advantageous state, and the end-time performance execution means may execute a common end-time performance in the case where the game machine is controlled to the first state after the end of the second advantageous state and in the case where the game machine is controlled to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state, and may execute a common end-time performance in the case where the game machine is controlled to the first state after the end of the third advantageous state and in the case where the game machine is controlled to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state. For example, the jackpot end performance pattern in the jackpot performance control example AKC13 may be common in response to the maximum number of times the jackpot opening port is opened.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the first state or the second state will occur when the end-of-game performance is executed, it is possible to increase the interest in the variable display.

[10] A counting means capable of setting counting information in response to the end of an advantageous state is provided, and the counting means sets counting information indicating a first designated value when controlled to a first state, and sets counting information indicating a second designated value when controlled to a second state, and may be capable of displaying a common background image during the first state and the second state. Here, the counting means may be, for example, a special period performance designated value buffer. The first designated value may be, for example, 07 [H]. The second designated value may be, for example, 0E [H]. The common background image may be, for example, a performance image of a high base medium background in the performance execution example AK101.
In such a configuration, it is difficult to tell whether the player is in the first state or the second state based on the display of the background image, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the variable display.

[11] The variable display pattern determination means may be capable of determining a variable display pattern using common determination data when the number of times the variable display is executed in the first state is less than the first number of times and when the number of times the variable display is executed in the second state is less than the first number of times. For example, the common determination data may be table data of a variable pattern determination table that is specified when the variable pattern type CB2-1 is selected.
In such a configuration, the commonality of the variable display is increased, making it difficult to recognize whether the player is in the first state or the second state, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[12] The variable display pattern determination means may be capable of determining the variable display pattern using different determination data when the variable display is executed a first number of times in the first state and when the variable display is executed a first number of times in the second state. For example, the variable display pattern determination table may be data specified when the variable pattern type CB1-8 is selected and when the variable pattern type CB1-9 is selected.
In such a configuration, the first number of variable displays can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[13] The variable display pattern determination means can determine a first non-specific pattern for executing a variable display for a first variable display period when the display result of the variable display in which the execution count is a first number of times in the first state is not a specific result, and can determine a second non-specific pattern for executing a variable display for a second variable display period that is a period that is more than twice the first variable display period when the display result of the variable display in which the execution count is a first number of times in the second state is not a specific result, and the notification means can execute a value notification during the variable display by the first non-specific pattern, and execute a value notification and a notification that the second state is in the variable display by the second non-specific pattern. Here, the first variable display period may be, for example, a case where the special chart fluctuation time is 12500 milliseconds. The first non-specific pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB1-8. The second variable display period may be, for example, a case where the special chart fluctuation time is 29900 milliseconds. The second non-specific pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB1-9. The notification that the second state is reached may be, for example, performance execution example AK105.
In such a configuration, the first number of variable displays can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[14] A specific display means capable of displaying a specific image may be provided, and the specific display means may not display the specific image while a value notification is executed during a variable display in which the number of executions in the first state is a first number, and may display the specific image in association with the execution of a value notification during a variable display in which the number of executions in the second state is a first number. Here, the specific image may be, for example, a performance image of the button display AKE01. The specific display means may be, for example, an image display device 5. Not displaying the specific image may be, for example, a performance execution example AK103. Displaying the specific image may be, for example, a performance execution example AK104.
In such a configuration, by executing appropriate notification, it is possible to increase interest in the game related to the variable display.

[15] The notification means executes a value notification during a variable display in which the number of executions during a special state is a first number, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a first special pattern capable of executing a first variable display performance in which the proportion of control to an advantageous state is high when the number of executions of the variable display during a special state is less than the first number, and a second special pattern capable of executing a second variable display performance in which the proportion of control to an advantageous state is lower than the first variable display performance, and the second special pattern has a shorter variable display period than the first special pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the second special pattern when the number of executions of the variable display during a special state is a first number. Here, the first variable display performance may be, for example, a reach performance of a super reach SPF. The first special pattern may be, for example, a variable pattern PB2-3. The second variable display performance may be, for example, a reach performance of a super reach SPE. The second special pattern may be, for example, a variable pattern PB2-2. The variable display period of the first special pattern may be, for example, a special chart fluctuation time of 35,500 milliseconds. The variable display period of the second special pattern may be, for example, a special chart fluctuation time of 16,500 milliseconds. Variable display patterns having a shorter variable display period than the second special pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB1-8 having a special chart fluctuation time of 12,500 milliseconds, a fluctuation pattern PB3-2 having a special chart fluctuation time of 4,500 milliseconds, a fluctuation pattern PB3-9 having a special chart fluctuation time of 11,500 milliseconds, etc.
In such a configuration, the variable display in which the value is notified can be appropriately executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[16] The variable display pattern determination means can determine any one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a first special pattern capable of executing a first variable display performance in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high when the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state is less than the first number, and a second special pattern capable of executing a second variable display performance in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is lower than the first variable display performance, and can determine any one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a first pattern corresponding to a case in which the display result of the variable display executed the first number of times during a special state is a specific result, and a second pattern corresponding to a case in which the display result of the variable display executed the first number of times during a special state is not a specific result, and the first pattern and the second pattern may have a shorter variable display period than the second special pattern. Here, the first variable display performance may be, for example, a reach performance of a super reach SPF. The first special pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB2-3. The second special pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB2-2. The first pattern may be, for example, the variable patterns PB3-2, PB3-9, etc. The second pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB1-8, etc. The variable display period may be short, for example, in the case of the variable display control example AKC31.
In such a configuration, the variable display in which the value is notified can be appropriately executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[17] The advantageous state includes a first value advantageous state and a second value advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first value advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a first pattern corresponding to a case where the display result of the variable display that is executed a first number of times during the special state is a specific result, and a second pattern corresponding to a case where the display result of the variable display that is executed a first number of times during the special state is not a specific result, and the first pattern includes a third pattern that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that is a trigger for control to the first value advantageous state, and a fourth pattern that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that is a trigger for control to the second value advantageous state, and the third and fourth patterns may have a shorter variable display period than the second pattern. Here, the first value advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is any one of "02", "04", and "07". The second value advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening port is opened is "10". The first pattern may be, for example, fluctuation patterns PB3-2, PB3-9, etc. The second pattern may be, for example, fluctuation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9, etc. The third pattern may be, for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-2, etc. The fourth pattern may be, for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-9, etc. The variable display period may be short, for example, when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C[H], 0D[H] in the variable display control example AKC31.
In such a configuration, the element of surprise when the first number of variable displays results in a specific result can be increased, thereby enhancing interest in the game related to the variable displays.

[18] The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having a smaller number of unit games than the first advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine one of a plurality of specific variable display patterns in response to a variable display that triggers control to the first advantageous state when the number of executions of the variable display in the special state is less than the first number, and can determine a special variable display pattern in response to the number of executions of the variable display in the special state being the first number, and the special variable display pattern may have a shorter variable display period than the average variable display period in the plurality of specific variable display patterns. Here, the first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is "10". The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is "02", "04", or "07". The specific variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11. The special variable display pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB3-2, PB3-9, etc. The variable display period may be short, for example, in the case of the big win type KA15 in the variable display control example AKC21, or in the case of the variable display result being "big win" with the presentation state selection designated value 0C [H], 0D [H] in the variable display control example AKC31.
In such a configuration, the first number of variable displays can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[19] The advantageous state includes a first type advantageous state and a second type advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern capable of executing a notification by the notification means in response to the variable display being executed a first number of times in the special state, using the specific determination data, and is capable of determining a variable display pattern using normal determination data when the variable display is executed a first number of times in the special state, and the normal determination data is capable of determining the first type variable display pattern in response to the variable display that triggers control to the first type advantageous state, and controls to the second type advantageous state. A second type variable display pattern can be determined in response to a variable display that triggers control to a first type advantageous state, and a common type common variable display pattern can be determined for the specific determination data in the case of a variable display that triggers control to a second type advantageous state, and a notification variable display pattern that can execute notification by a notification means can be determined in response to a variable display that does not trigger control to an advantageous state, and the type common variable display pattern is included in the first type variable display pattern and the second type variable display pattern, and may have a shorter variable display period than the notification variable display pattern. Here, the first type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "02". The second type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "04". The specific determination data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table that is specified when the variable pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected. The normal determination data may be, for example, table data of a variation pattern determination table that is specified when the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. The first type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-1, PB3-2, etc. The second type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8, etc. The type-common variable display pattern may be, for example, variation pattern PB3-2, etc. The notification variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9, etc. The variable display period may be short, for example, in the case of variation pattern PB3-2 compared to variation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9 in the variable display control example AKC32.
In such a configuration, an increase in data volume can be prevented, and the sense of surprise when the variable display results in a specific result can be increased, thereby improving interest in the game related to the variable display.

[20] The variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern that can be notified by the notification means in response to the execution number of the variable display during the special state being a first number of times, using the specific determination data, and can determine a variable display pattern using the normal determination data when the execution number of the variable display during the special state is less than the first number of times, and the total number of variable display patterns that can be determined using the specific determination data may be less than the total number of variable display patterns that can be determined using the normal determination data. Here, the specific determination data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table that is specified when the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected. The normal determination data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table that is specified when the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. A small total number may be, for example, when the total number of fluctuation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9, PB3-2, and PB3-9 is "4" compared to the total number of fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-11 in variable display control example AKC21 and fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 in variable display control example AKC31, which is "13."
In such a configuration, an increase in data volume can be prevented, and interest in the game relating to the variable display can be increased.

[21] The first state is a state in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state, and the control for making the variable display easier to execute than that of the normal state can be executed until the first number of variable displays are executed, and the second state is a state in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is the same as that of the normal state, and the control for making the variable display easier to execute than that of the normal state can be executed until the second number of variable displays are executed, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the variable display pattern using the first determination data until the number of executions of the variable display in the second state becomes the first number, and can determine the variable display pattern using the second determination data after the number of executions of the variable display in the second state exceeds the first number, and the variable display pattern that can be determined using the second determination data may have a shorter average variable display period than the variable display pattern that can be determined using the first determination data. Here, the first determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS04, and the second determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS02. The average variable display period may be short, for example, when the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 includes fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3, whereas the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2 and CB1-3 do not include fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3.
In such a configuration, the variable display during the second state can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[22] The variable display pattern that can be determined using the first determination data includes a performance variable display pattern that can notify whether or not to execute a specific performance to control to an advantageous state after a reach state is established in the variable display, and the variable display pattern that can be determined using the second determination data does not need to include a performance variable display pattern. Here, the specific performance may be, for example, a super reach SPE, a reach performance of an SPF, etc. The performance variable display pattern may be, for example, a variation pattern PB2-2, PB2-3, etc.
In such a configuration, the variable display during the second state can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[23] The advantageous state includes a specific advantageous state in which a specific condition can be satisfied, the special state control means may be capable of controlling to a first special state after termination of the specific advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the specific condition during the specific advantageous state, and may be capable of controlling to a second special state after termination of the specific advantageous state based on the non-satisfaction of the specific condition during the specific advantageous state, the first special state and the second special state being states in which the variable display is likely to be executed until a first number of variable displays are executed, the variable display pattern determination means may be capable of determining a variable display pattern using first special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed in the first special state being less than the first number, may be capable of determining a variable display pattern using second special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed in the second special state being less than the first number, and may be capable of determining a variable display pattern using third special determination data in response to the first number of times the variable display is executed in the first special state and the first number of times the variable display is executed in the second special state. Here, the specific condition may be, for example, a specific area passing flag being on. The specific advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. The first special state may be, for example, a high probability high base state in which the time-saving counter initial value corresponding to a V win is "70". The second special state may be, for example, a low probability high base state in which the time-saving counter initial value corresponding to no V win is "70". The first special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS03. The second special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS04. The third special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS08.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data volume while appropriately executing the variable display up to the first number of times, thereby enhancing interest in the game relating to the variable display.

[24] The game machine has a specific area and is provided with a variable winning means that can be changed to a first change state where the game medium can enter and a second change state where the game medium cannot easily enter, and a specific condition is established when the game medium passes through the specific area during a specific advantageous state, and the first state is a state in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state and variable display is more likely to be executed than that of the normal state, and the second state is a state in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is the same as that of the normal state and variable display is more likely to be executed than that of the normal state. Here, the specific area may be, for example, a V winning area 51. The first change state may be, for example, an open state. The second change state may be, for example, a closed state. The variable winning means may be, for example, a special variable winning ball device 50.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data volume while appropriately executing the variable display up to the first number of times, thereby enhancing the interest in the game relating to the variable display.

[25] The advantageous state includes a special advantageous state in which a specific condition is difficult to satisfy, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a third special state after the special advantageous state ends based on the satisfaction of the specific condition during the special advantageous state, and is capable of controlling to a fourth special state after the special advantageous state ends based on the non-satisfaction of the specific condition during the special advantageous state, the third special state and the fourth special state are states in which the variable display is likely to be executed until a second number of variable displays are executed, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern using the first special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed in the third special state being less than the first number. In the fourth special state, the variable display pattern can be determined using the second special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than the first number, and in the third special state, the variable display pattern can be determined using the fourth special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being the first number and the number of times the variable display is executed being the first number, and in the third special state, the variable display pattern can be determined using the common determination data in the case where the number of times the variable display is executed being exceeded the first number and the case where the number of times the variable display is executed being exceeded the first number. Here, the special advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11. The third special state may be, for example, a high probability high base state in which the time-saving counter initial value corresponding to the presence of a V prize is "10000". The fourth special state may be, for example, a low probability high base state in which the time-saving counter initial value corresponding to no V prize is "10000". The first special decision data may be, for example, table data corresponding to reference table TS03. The second special decision data may be, for example, table data corresponding to reference table TS04. The fourth special decision data may be, for example, table data corresponding to reference table TS09. The common decision data may be, for example, table data corresponding to reference table TS02.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data volume while appropriately executing the variable display more than the first number of times, thereby enhancing the interest in the game relating to the variable display.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning port 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 13 ... Sound control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal pattern display device 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I/O
120 ... Performance control CPU
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player ,
A suggestion performance execution means for suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including at least a first suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance having different expectations depending on the performance mode;
A special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image;
and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that changes the suggestive effect being executed in one performance mode to a performance mode having a higher expectation than the one performance mode by using the displayed special image,
The special image display effect execution means displays the special image in a manner that the special image moves so as to pass through a display position of the suggestion effect that is a target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed,
The special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect by a predetermined pattern of executing the special effect by changing the presentation mode of the first suggestion effect after the special image is stopped at a specific position, and a specific pattern of executing the special effect by changing the presentation mode of the second suggestion effect after the special image passes the specific position without being stopped at the specific position,
The ratio of the special effect being controlled to the advantageous state when the special effect is executed according to the predetermined pattern is different from the ratio of the special effect being executed according to the specific pattern,
When the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation changes due to the special presentation, there are a plurality of presentation modes after the change, and the proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on which presentation mode is changed to,
When the presentation mode is changed by the special presentation, the suggestion presentation has a longer execution time than when the presentation mode is not changed by the special presentation;
The special effect execution means is capable of displaying a specific image when executing the special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images